JP6912419B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing a game using a gaming medium.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device and the game medium wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as "starting prize"), it is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") the identification information when the game medium wins a prize in a specific winning area (also referred to as "starting area") is provided, and the variable display device can be used for identification. Depending on the display result of the variable display of the information, the one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player or a predetermined state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. be.

The advantageous state means a state that is advantageous to the player who has been given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous to the player in which the game medium is likely to win a prize (big hit game state), or a state in which the right to become advantageous to the player is generated. , A state in which a predetermined game value (for example, the number of prize balls won) is given, such as a state in which the conditions for paying out the prize game medium are easily satisfied. Further, the predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player as in the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than that of the advantageous state (small hit game state).

In such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as the identification information becomes the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating "big hit", for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the gaming medium is opened. It shifts to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where it is easy to win a prize, and in each opening period, it is large when there is a prize in a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. The winning opening will be closed. Further, when the display result of the variable display device is in a display mode (small hit symbol) indicating "small hit", for example, an advantageous state in which the large winning opening is opened once and the game medium can win a prize (small hit game state). When a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the big winning opening is closed.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state (small hit gaming state) (for example, the frequency of small hits per unit time) is higher than the normal state (special state). Some are controllable. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that in a special state (KT state), the frequency of transition to the small hit gaming state is improved as compared with the normal state, which is advantageous for the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-30634 (paragraph 0074, 0268)

By the way, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state (KT state) described in Patent Document 1, the game value (for example, the number of prize-winning balls) acquired by the player in the special state is displayed. The production in the special state is required to be further improved in order to improve the interest of the game.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, that can improve the effect and improve the interest of the game.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is a non-special state and a special state that is more advantageous than the non-special state. The state control means is provided with a state control means that can control the state and a specific display means that can display a specific display related to the given game value, and the state control means is a special state rather than the first special state and the first special state. It can be controlled to an advantageous second special state, and the specific display means displays the specific display when it is controlled to the second special state, and limits the specific display when it is controlled to the first special state. Further, the variable means capable of changing between the first state in which the game medium can pass through the predetermined area and the second state in which the game medium cannot pass through the predetermined area or is difficult, and a state different from the advantageous state, which is variable. When the special state control means capable of controlling the special state including the change of the means to the first state and the game value are given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state. The variable means includes a grant effect executing means capable of executing the grant effect, and the variable means prevents the gaming medium launched toward the variable means from passing through a predetermined area after being notified that the special state is controlled. The variable display provided and does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is provided in the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period and in the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. The ratio that can be executed by a certain second variable display pattern and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state is that the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. After that, the ratio is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the special state, and the granting effect executing means is given the game value based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state in the second special state. Occasionally, the granting effect is executed, and in the first special state, the granting effect is not executed when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, and the second special state is not executed. The special state is a state in which the game value is easily given because it is easier to be controlled to the special state than the non-special state, and when it is controlled to the special state in the variable display when it is controlled to the second special state. , When a predetermined notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is executed as a notification effect for notifying the result of the variable display, and the variable display is controlled to the special state when the first special state is controlled. In the news It is characterized in that a predetermined notification effect is not executed as an intellectual effect. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.
(Means 1) Another gaming machine is a gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a non-special state (for example, non-KT). A state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can control a state) and a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more advantageous than the non-special state. Specific display means (for example, step S976C in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a specific payout display 82) relating to the given game value (for example, the number of prize balls). A part that executes S976G, S976K, and S976L), and the state control means has, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state). For example, it can be controlled to the second KT state), and the specific display means can display the specific display when it is controlled to the second special state, and limits the specific display when it is controlled to the first special state. Variable winning means (eg, variable winning ball device 9015) that is possible (see, eg, FIG. 68) and can be varied between a first state in which the gaming medium can win and a second state in which the gaming medium cannot or is difficult to win. And a special variable winning ball device 9022) and a special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a portion that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560), and the variable winning means is in a special state. It is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that it is controlled by the computer (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and a small number is provided. (Achieved by setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the winning game to 0.8 seconds), the variable display period is the first period of the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state. The first variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display pattern # 25, # 27 of shortened variation) and the second variable display pattern (for example, continuation) which is the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It can be executed by the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) including the effect, and in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is the first. It is lower than the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the variable display pattern (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low. (Or not determined). (See FIG. 88). According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a variable starting device capable of changing the state between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is easy to enter and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to enter. (For example, a variable winning ball device 15), a predetermined variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of entering a game medium, a non-specific opening pattern, and the non-specific opening pattern. Step S26C in the variable starting device control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of controlling the state of the variable starting device is executed with the specific opening pattern in which the game medium is more likely to flow down to the predetermined variable device than the specific opening pattern. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15 (1) and 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a portion that controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state for 5.5 seconds or 0.2 seconds), and is controlled to the first special state. When this is done, the variable starting device is easily controlled in a non-specific opening pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds), so that the variable starting device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds. When the game medium is difficult to enter the device and is controlled in the second special state, the variable starting device is easily controlled by the specific opening pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball. The device 15 is opened only for 0.2 seconds), so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device. According to such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the special state can be changed by the opening pattern of the variable starting device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or the means 2, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. Display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable pattern selection means for selecting a variable display variation pattern (for example, steps S301 and S351 in the game control microcomputer 560). A special state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. The ratio of being controlled to the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state based on the variable display of the first identification information (the part that executes). For example, (see FIGS. 65 (c) and 65 (d)), when the variation pattern selection means is controlled in the special state, the variation in the variable display of the second identification information is changed as compared with the case where the variation pattern selection means is controlled in the non-special state. As a pattern, a second variation pattern having a variation time shorter than the variation time of a specific variation pattern (for example, 15 minutes of the second variation pattern # 01 shown in FIG. 13) (for example, a second variation time of 7 seconds shown in FIG. 13). It may be characterized in that it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern # 03). According to such a configuration, by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage can be changed between the special state and the non-special state, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. A portion of the computer 560 that executes steps S358 to S360), a predetermined variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22) into which the game medium can enter when controlled to a special state, and a second special state are controlled. When the game medium enters the predetermined variable device when it is controlled to a special state, a special effect (for example, a prize ball addition display) can be executed as a special effect execution means (for example, an effect control microcomputer). The computer 200 includes steps S657B and S657C), and the specific display means changes the display content of the specific display in response to the execution of the special effect (for example, the specific ball display 82). It may be characterized in that it is possible to execute (updating the displayed contents). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the predetermined variable device in the special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, a special state control means (for example, a game control micro) that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. (Part of executing steps S358 to S360 in the computer 560) and, in the case of being controlled to the second special state, when the special state is continuously controlled based on the continuously variable display of the identification information, a special effect is produced. (For example, a special effect executing means capable of executing (for example, a small hit combo display 86)) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the special state has occurred continuously, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

(Means 6) In any of the means 1 to the means 5, the specific display means has a display different from the specific display (for example, the specific payout display 82), and corresponds to a predetermined period including an advantageous state and a special state. It is possible to display a special display (for example, a special payout display 85) related to the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given in the above, and when the special state is controlled, the specific display and the special display are separated. It may be characterized in that it can be displayed separately (see, for example, FIGS. 70 (2) and 71 (3)). According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given corresponding to the predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 7) In any of the means 1 to the means 6, an advantageous notification executing means (for example, a step in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing an advantageous notification (for example, a jackpot notification effect) relating to being controlled in an advantageous state. A part for executing S976D and S976M) is provided, and the advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, a sudden jackpot) whose degree of advantage is lower than that of the first advantageous state. When it is controlled to the first advantageous state, it is controlled to the second special state after the end of the first advantageous state, and when it is controlled to the second advantageous state, it is controlled to the second after the end of the second advantageous state. 2 Controlled to a special state, the advantageous notification executing means executes advantageous notification regarding being controlled to the first advantageous state when controlled to the second special state (for example, a jackpot notification based on a 16R probability variation jackpot). (Execute the effect), and when controlled to the second special state, limit the execution of the advantageous notification regarding being controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, do not execute the jackpot notification effect based on the sudden jackpot). It may be characterized by that. According to such a configuration, since the execution / restriction of the advantageous notification changes according to the type of the advantageous state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

(Means 8) In the means 7, a signal output means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) capable of externally outputting an advantageous state signal (for example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state. When the signal output means is controlled to the first advantageous state when the signal output means is controlled to the second special state). It may be characterized in that the advantageous state signal is output to the outside, and when it is controlled to the second special state, the advantageous state signal is not output to the outside when it is controlled to the second advantageous state. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal that matches the content of the advantageous notification, the content of the external output does not reduce the interest of the game.

(Means 9) In any of the means 1 to the means 8, the advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state (for example, 16R normal jackpot) and a special advantageous state (for example, a sudden jackpot) having different degrees of advantage, and is specified and displayed. When the means is controlled to the special state, the means displays a specific display (for example, a specific payout display 82) regarding the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given in response to the special state, and the special state. When controlled to a specific advantageous state, the specific display is terminated, and when controlled to a special advantageous state, the specific display is continued (for example, FIG. 70 (4)). ~ (7)), which may be a feature. According to such a configuration, since the continuation / end of the specific display changes according to the type of the advantageous state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 10-14. Conventionally, the gaming medium is launched after being notified that the gaming machine is controlled to a special state (for example, after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-5513. Even so, it is conceivable to configure the variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device) so as not to win a prize. However, when the variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable display with a long variable display period is executed and then controlled to a special state, the variable winning means cannot win the game medium, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Instead of not being able to do it, there is a risk that it will be less interesting. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the deterioration of the interest and enhancing the effect of the production.

(Means 10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the gaming medium can win a prize. A variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable winning ball device 9022) that can change between one state and a second state in which the gaming medium cannot or is difficult to win, is a state different from the advantageous state and is variable. With a special state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the winning means to the first state. In a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state. Steps S902208A, S902211A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B) were provided, and the variable winning means was fired toward the variable winning means after being notified that it was controlled to a special state. It is provided so that the game medium cannot be won (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation). It can be executed by # 27) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), which is the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. In the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is lower than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern ( For example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 88).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

(11) In the game machine of the above (10), a promotion notification means (for example, right-handed notification) capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to a predetermined route when controlled to a special state ( For example, the effect display device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), and the promotion notification means is subjected to variable display by the first variable display pattern. (For example, in the KT state, the fluctuation time is relatively long) may be made so that the promotion notification can be executed in different modes depending on whether the display is performed or the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. When the variation display is executed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28), the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed movement.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

(12) In the game machine of the above (10) or (11), it is shown that the storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiver 904) and the storage means are in a full tank state. It is equipped with a full tank notification means (for example, realized by displaying the characters "full tank error" or outputting an error sound on the effect display device 909) that can execute the full tank notification, and the full tank notification is provided. The means may be able to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when it is controlled to the advantageous state and when it is controlled to the special state (for example, in the second KT state, in the second KT state). Compared to the jackpot game state, the full tank notification may be executed in a conservative manner (for example, the character size of "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), and the storage amount is stored in the jackpot game state. When exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed. .).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

(13) In the gaming machines (10) to (12) above, when the special state is controlled again based on the execution of the next variable display after being controlled to the special state in the special state. A special effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S90933 and S90944 according to the process table selected in step S90928 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) that can execute a special effect (for example, a continuous small hit effect) is provided. May be good.
According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(14) In any of the game machines (10) to (13) above, a counting display (for example, a prize) is performed based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening or a special winning opening 9024). A counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S90707 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) that can update and display the number of balls) is provided, and the counting display executing means is a period until the updated counting result is displayed. The count display can be updated and displayed by the first pattern in which is the first specific period and the second pattern in which the period until the updated count result is displayed is longer than the first specific period. (For example, when the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is displayed by increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the number of prize balls is displayed in the second KT pattern. When displaying 90305, the number of prize balls may be incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds).
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal output by a game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal output by a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the 1st KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the hold storage display control processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display control processing in modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display control such as the 2nd hold display in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball addition display processing in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process table selection process in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the time chart about the payout display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the payout display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the payout display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the prize ball addition display in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the small hit combo effect in the modification 2. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the variation pattern of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the production control microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous small hit effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship between the content of hold storage and the limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the continuous small hit production.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which a hit game ball (hit ball) can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). It should be noted that the fact that the display contents are easy to visually recognize means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. In addition, the winning means that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the effect symbol variation display on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total number of hold storages) which is the total of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first valid starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 17 is detected by the actuating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also referred to as the open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, when the variable winning ball device 15 hits the normal symbol display 10 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used to perform a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins in the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 24 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Perform the striking operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball is the gate 32. The time from passing through to the variable winning ball device 15 being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is released. It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. It will be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 9b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the right to continue may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right side of the base plate portion 101.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right is allowed to flow down to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in the state of being in the state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom member 23. A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom surface member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom surface member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the sound to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the telephone number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the content of the program is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped, such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10 is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all the hits are unconditionally made a small hit (however, as will be described later, it is a forced loss after the fact. In some cases).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not the second KT state even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to a probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S2215B and S2010-S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Eighteen types from # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is aimed at by a small hit even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Pattern # 03 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 05 to # 07, # 30 It is decided to be one of. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. Alternatively, the second fluctuation pattern # 030 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second, may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In this embodiment, when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 06, the effect display device 9 In the variable display of the background symbol in the above, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a character such as "Chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 10 to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start prize is also obtained when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. The variation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second variation pattern # 10) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 31 It is decided to be either.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuations occur. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 13 of the shortened fluctuation having a short time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 031 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 31 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. It may be determined by pattern # 17. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, has passed, the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is shorter than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 when it is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 2.6 seconds, has passed, and the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually longer in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is longer than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 before it is played. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Whether or not to hit the normal figure is determined by different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to shorten the closing period (interval period) in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 15 (1) is provided. A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the variable display of the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 provided on the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting opening winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216). The first effective start winning command includes a preliminary determination result.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), the value of the first hold storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first hold storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High probability / 1st KT background specification command is judged to be in 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is judged to be high probability / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send the background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is determined.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used is determined (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control the transmission of the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011) to see if it becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state (1st KT flag). Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 controls to start the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 (see FIGS. 32 and 33) if they have not yet been output (step S2015X).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate (step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, with respect to the external outputs of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, even before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 and the jackpot game is started. , The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification for urging the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls, which is less than a predetermined number, is detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the detection of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 does not output an external signal, while the detection of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 outputs an external signal. It may be configured to do so.

In the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14 or the second start winning opening 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

In this embodiment, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, for example, the low probability / first KT state is terminated before the amusement store is closed. Later, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol remains, the second special symbol will fluctuate for a long time (5 minutes) in a situation where the player has finished the game due to the closing of the game store. Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the display, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1 between the closing of the game store and the next opening of the store. At this time, the clerk will open the store after initializing (RAM clear).

Further, not only before the closing of the game store, but also when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, and the second special There is a case where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data of the designated command during opening of the large winning opening when the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411). , Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening to be in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting opening winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release preprocessing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 25a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350, it means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

Further, when the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S164B), and decides to make the small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be a small hit (forced loss). (Except for cases), but not limited to such aspects. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether or not to make a small hit. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, it may be configured to determine a small hit with a 100% probability, or it may be configured to determine a deviation with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is determined.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and determines the big hit type. Therefore, control is performed to send one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process has been explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S2208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the item has been stored and a second KT memory flag indicating that the device has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, it is determined whether or not the first KT memory flag or the second KT memory flag is set. You just have to check. If neither the 1st KT state nor the 2nd KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the 1st KT flag is set and the state shifts to the 1st KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. It may be configured to subtract 1 from the time timer.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the external output signal output by the gaming machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is in the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same process as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal plate provided in the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the gaming machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game. Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the period of all jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, a signal for the planned number of prize balls is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

In the example shown in FIG. 32, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to externally output different special winning opening winning signals depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the external output signal output by the gaming machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. .. The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. Further, the special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a signal dedicated to the small hit which is continuously output to the outside during the period of the small hit game may be provided.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the gate The switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passing process (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5102A): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time, and the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the number of gate passing memories is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passing memory counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol hits.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a normal symbol hit judgment random number (random 4) is set, and is in a normal state. There is a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the KT state is more likely to generate a start prize to the second start winning opening 14 than the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the normal symbol determination table for KT is selected (Y, S5123B in steps S5123A), and if it is in the normal state. Normally, the normal symbol determination table is selected (unless the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set) (N, S5123C in step S5123A).

Then, in step S5124, if it is in the KT state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number value read in step S5122 is within the range of [3 to 12], and in the normal state. If there is, it is determined whether or not the random value for determination of hitting the normal symbol read in step S5122 is [3]. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5126), and proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5130B in step S5130). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5130C in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5124). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5124, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5102A) (step S5164).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2 in the first KT state, whereas 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 15. By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. The first instruction notification includes the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right-handed" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and "right-handed" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. A first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image containing the characters "" is provided, and as a second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a second reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected within 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S3805).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S635). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S640).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S641), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 each (one prize to the large prize opening). (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S651).

The first prize ball count counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villas, the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state. It will be added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on a game ball winning in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on a game ball winning in the special winning opening 24 in all small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball number counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the counter for the number of prize balls in the second prize after addition is displayed. The number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24), respectively. (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S654). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") on the effect display device 9. (Step S657). Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S658), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S657 to S659.

By executing the processes of steps S656 to S656, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball addition display is displayed and the winning sound is output. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, while the special winning opening 24 is not in the second KT state even if the game ball wins, the winning ball addition display is displayed, the winning sound is output, and the special winning opening is displayed. The lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4301), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4302).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4303), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the stop-displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Whether or not it is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not the command is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags is set), the process proceeds to step S4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets the instruction notification timer to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (step S4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the preparatory display flag indicating that the preparatory display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. The display may be configured to correspond to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed if it is in the KT state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 41.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and performs a demo display control process (step S4502) for controlling the demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to the value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Processing during the round (step S905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S4605 in step S3503), and the first step is made. 1 If the reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing a demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not, proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, the normal state is determined.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is in the first demo display (Y in step S4713), the variation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S4714), or based on the variation of the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step S4715), the first demo display is terminated (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is KT.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step S4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state ends. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol change is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer. Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is in the second demo display (Y in step S4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or the KT state is finished (step). N) of S4815, the second demo display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 and # 18), step S923 and the background symbol fluctuation processing described later are performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. If the execution of the battle effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14, # 15, # 18), step S923 is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944 of the background symbol changing process, which will be described later, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the continuous effect (step S945). It should be noted that whether or not the continuous effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified in the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the continuous effect, the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display during the consecutive villas based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter (step S946). .. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is specified by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, whether the continuation effect is executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues. After suggesting whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the effect as if the second KT state has ended and the state has shifted to the first KT state is executed (however, at this stage, it is still the first internally. The 2KT state is not finished, and to be exact, the second KT state is finished at the start of the big hit), and then it develops into a battle production. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control (step described later). (See S982), but when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of order, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Further, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, Y in S5002), the jackpot is changed. The preparing display is executed (step S5003), and the preparing displayed flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is set. In step S5001, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and any one of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command for the second decorative symbol is executed. If it is stored, it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced loss designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. good.

Then, if the background symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, it is a case where the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 controls to start the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 ( Step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S984).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects the process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, the effect during the small hit game is executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of the predetermined opening sound nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. Or, it may be configured not to execute the small hit medium processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the out-of-order symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985), the effect control CPU 201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S9007). ). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 3 designation command) that specifies the 6R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 5) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / a second KT state after the big hit game ends), if the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed, the second prize ball is displayed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush based on the number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the jackpot game that ends this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends). If), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S989), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not done, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

57 and 58 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 57, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time has the characters "Aim at the gate" and an image showing the game ball passing through the operating gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes indicates the operating gate 17. , The square area above it indicates the gate 32).

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), the first demo display is performed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the jackpot fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed. Is being done. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows an operating gate 17, and a square area above it shows a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (8).

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the first special symbol is changed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the change of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the presence / absence of the setting of the first KT flag, the presence / absence of execution of the normal symbol change, the presence / absence of the opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and the presence / absence of the change of the second special symbol. , And whether or not the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened is shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to open.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.2 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. Further, the first KT state is 7.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds as the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit. 1.0 second (assuming that the second reserved storage number ≥ 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled to.

At this time, the fluctuation time (7) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state. .0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, when the standby before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. It is conceivable that a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 in spite of being in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined route among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). When it is Y in step S2501 (the part where steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (In this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state. Yes (in this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions. The predetermined promotion notification (first instruction notification in this example) is executed, and the launch of the game medium into the specific area is promoted after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. It is decided that the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) can be executed (in this example, the portion where steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A gaming machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when the gaming medium passes through a specific area is described, and the gaming machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a gaming machine having a configuration in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the gaming ball, and then launches the gaming ball. May be done. Similarly, in a gaming machine that shifts to the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player can use the gaming ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot gaming state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot gaming state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, the effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in the predetermined promotion notification, and the predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9 in the specific promotion notification.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be output externally based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example,). The game control microcomputer 560 executes step S2015X before executing step S2501 in the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process). As a result, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned gaming machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the gaming machine.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the game machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control). The microcomputer 560 waits for the current situation (waiting for the game ball to pass through the operation gate 17) when the power is turned off before the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If the information related to (in this example, "8", which is the value of the special symbol process flag corresponding to the process of waiting for passage through the first gate) is backed up, and the information is backed up when the power is turned on. A predetermined command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 executes a first instruction notification, a second instruction notification, or an effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on when the predetermined command is received. By doing so, it may be notified that the predetermined condition is satisfied). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on the situation in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the game state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state according to the situation.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle production in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect during the fluctuation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim at the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit game state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the variable production and the big hit production are a series of battle productions). good. At that time, if it is a jackpot of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, a jackpot with a long opening period of the jackpot, a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic state, a jackpot that shifts to a KT state), the battle is won. If it is a big hit of a disadvantageous type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state), it will be defeated in the battle. May be good.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, the part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol). The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of, and the second effect identification information (in this example, the second decoration) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol in this example). It is possible to derive and display the display result by executing the variable display of the symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed), and in the normal state, the second effect identification information. The variable display may be difficult to see, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easy to see (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 has the second special symbol in the normal state. The second decorative symbol may be erased during the fluctuation of, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). This makes it possible to pay attention to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved storage number.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" is a concept including "not visible" and "difficult to see".

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of executing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a specific area through which the game medium can pass (a specific area (in this example, a game ball). In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) can be executed. At the same time, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed (in this example, the game control micro). By executing steps S26A and S26B in the computer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is After the stop display) is established, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the game control). A predetermined state (a portion for executing steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357), which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a small hit game state) in the case of Y in step S2501 in the computer 560. (In this example, the part that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased compared to the normal state (in this example, the KT state). ) (In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the specific area is determined based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to execute the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium (in this example, the part that executes steps S4604 and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the player can execute the specific promotion notification. When the absence condition corresponding to the absence (in this example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the establishment, the specific promotion notification is executed in a predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and when the absence condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is set by the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the fact that it was established The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the normal mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). Thereby, in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied, the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A gaming machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when the gaming medium passes through a specific area is described, but the gaming machine promotes the launch of the gaming medium into the specific area. There was a risk that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally played. When the final player who has been playing the game has already finished the game, but the other player is temporarily away from the seat and plays the game of the game machine. It is conceivable that a new player may be reluctant to play a game on the gaming machine because he thinks that it may lead to trouble. Therefore, like the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the consciousness of avoidance by a new player by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, and promote the operation of the gaming machine. be able to.

In addition, there are those who try to enjoy the advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an act is performed, the fairness of the game is lacking. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player). By executing the specific promotion notification in, it is difficult to recognize that the situation is before the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, it is set as an "absence condition" that the change of the first special symbol is not executed even though it is in the normal state (to be exact, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When it happens, it is considered that the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but it is not limited to this. For example, the player does not touch the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (operation gate 17, gate 32, first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening, etc. The "absence condition" may be that the passage of the game ball through the special winning opening 24) is not detected for a predetermined period. Further, for example, it may be set as an "absence condition" that the start winning prize does not occur within a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the absence effect). , 1st demo display) can be executed (in this example, the part where step S4716 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thereby, the player's game can be appropriately promoted.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state that reduces the power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the demo display. It may be. In the power saving state, it is consumed in each effect member by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the brightness of the image display device 5, and reducing the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with the effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200), and the game control means is the first absence information (in this example) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information. , 1st customer waiting demo display designation command) and 2nd absence information (in this example, the 2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second identification information. It is determined that transmission is possible (in this example, the portion where steps S51A and S51B in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demo display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol and the absence condition are satisfied based on the second special symbol. It was decided to separately provide a second customer waiting demo display designation command to indicate whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and a command to indicate whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state, when the first special symbol is not changed in the state where the first reserved memory is not stored (regardless of whether the second special symbol is changed or the second reserved memory is present). When the common command is transmitted and the second special symbol is not changed in the KT state when the second reserved memory is not stored (whether or not the first special symbol is changed or the first reserved memory is stored). The common command may be sent (with or without).

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information indicating whether or not it is controlled to a special state (background specification command in this example) and absence information indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display) A designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designated command) can be transmitted (in this example, the part that executes steps S51A, S51B, S60A, and S60B in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means is special. It is possible to execute an absentee effect indicating that the absentee condition is satisfied based on the state control information and the absentee information (in this example, in step S4502 of the effect control microcomputer 200, a background designation command and a customer waiting demo display are displayed. The part where the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the specified command). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold memory (in this example, the second hold memory). A means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Steps S904 to S907 in steps), the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold memory indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information controlled in the advantageous state. If this is done, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, when the game control microcomputer 560 is Y in step S64BB, the processing after step S65B is not performed. Even when the jackpot random number is stored as the second hold memory, the fluctuation with respect to the second hold memory is forcibly removed, and the effect control microcomputer 200 does not execute the jackpot effect related to the second identification information). .. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing the game, and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information. The variable display of (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. The specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (in this example, a portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first It is advantageous and advantageous for the player based on the fact that the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to a predetermined state different from the normal state (in this example, the small hit game state) (in this example, the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the state is controlled to a predetermined state rather than the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with increased frequency (in this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560). , It is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, a display in preparation for a big hit) to notify that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, a part in which step S5003 is executed in the effect control computer 200). When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the person is not satisfied, the notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, for effect control). The microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002), and the second identification information is variable when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state. The execution of the notification effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 executes S5003 when it is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and N in S5002. do not). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A gaming machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) when the gaming medium passes through a specific area is described, but the gaming machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

Note that "restricting execution" means not executing as in the present embodiment or executing in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, executing a notification effect using an image smaller than usual or an image having a low density). It is a concept that includes (execution of a notification effect that outputs sound at a volume lower than usual).

Further, the specific example of the notification effect is not limited to that described above. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a notification effect. Further, as the notification effect, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a game medium (in this example, a game medium). A variable starting device (in this example, a variable starting device) that can be changed into an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which a game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a part in which step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the game medium entering the variable starting device (in this example). , The part that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560), Hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as hold storage (in this example, second hold storage) (this example). Then, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed. Part), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that in the normal state (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (book) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it can be controlled to a high probability / second KT state), and when it is controlled to the advantageous state, it is disadvantageous to enter the variable starting device for a specific period longer than when it is controlled to the first special state. It is possible to control the change to the state (in this example, step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560. By executing C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the jackpot game state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state. As the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state (the part controlled to the closed state), the variable display of the first period is executed regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the hold storage means. It is possible (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is set using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G). By deciding, it is possible to change the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state as the second and subsequent variable display of the second identification information. , When the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, variable display in the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (in this example, for game control). The microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, the second reserved storage number is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If it is 1 or more, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed for 1.0 second (the time is controlled to the first KT state and is shorter than the first variation time of 7.0 seconds). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a gaming machine in which the gaming medium is facilitated to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the gaming machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22 is actually reached. The special winning opening 24 of the above is set so as to rarely win a prize, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 is placed to some extent on the bottom member. There is a possibility that the game balls of the above are accumulated, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening 24. .. Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are accumulated on the bottom surface member even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls are dropped, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24, which is more than expected in the first KT state. It prevents the situation where the prize ball of is obtained.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. The variable display for one period can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G) is obtained in the first fluctuation. By determining the fluctuation pattern using the table, the second special symbol is used for 7.0 seconds (the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state is longer than 3.8 seconds) regardless of the number of reserved memories. (Fluctuation is feasible), and as a variable display of the second identification information after the second time controlled by the first special state, the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number or more. In this case, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the second and subsequent fluctuations, FIG. 13 (E). ) Or by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (H), if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the jackpot game state). The second special symbol can be changed over a time (less than 3.8 seconds)). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second special state, the second identification information is held regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled in the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is the second KT state in the second KT state. 2 When changing the special symbol, regardless of the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more, the second special symbol is changed over 1 second. If the second reserved memory number is 0, the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds.) As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, which is an advantageous state for the player (this example). Then, it is a game machine that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which the game medium (game ball in this example) can pass, and an approach advantage in which the game medium can enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between a state (open state in this example) and a disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. A game medium has passed through a special area with a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. It is possible to execute the variable display of the normal identification information (in this example, the normal symbol) based on the normal identification information (in this example, the part where steps S5100 to S5102 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the normal identification information is variablely displayed. Based on this, it is possible to change the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, the part where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable starting device. The variable display of the identification information can be executed (in this example, the part where step S26B is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit). Based on the design), it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560). S358 to S360 are executed), and it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A and S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560). , S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B) As special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. (In this example, it can be controlled to high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, the game medium that has passed through the special area when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed becomes the variable starting device. The variable starting device is controlled so that it can enter (in this example, a game ball). The shortest time required to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. By controlling the ball device 15 to the open state, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state and the winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the one game ball is variable as it is. It is possible to win a prize in the winning ball device 15). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a gaming machine in which the gaming medium is facilitated to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the gaming machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided, a game ball to a predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in some special states (first KT state). It is possible to suppress the invasion of. Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the second KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (2). (Controlled in a closed state for 3.8 seconds), the variable starting device is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starting device when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed. (In this example, the minimum time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15. Is 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the second KT state, a variable winning ball is won. When the ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable prize over a longer period than the first KT state. It was decided to control the ball device 15 to the closed state, but the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. May be realized.

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer symbol determination time than the first KT state. It may be realized to control the state.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit ( By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. You may.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is shown in FIG. As shown in (1), in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds, and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is operated for 3.8 seconds in the same manner as in the second KT state. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed (in this example, the game is controlled). The minimum time required for the ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.5 seconds. Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state. If this is the case, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being launched (right-handed) aiming at the special area in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer fluctuation time in the normal state than in the first KT state, so that the normal state has a variable winning ball device over a longer period than the first KT state. Although it was decided to control the 15 to the closed state, it was realized that the variable winning ball device 15 could be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. You may.

For example, by configuring the symbol determination time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. FIG. By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. May be good.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the small hit game state can be controlled. In that case, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started while the small hit variation of the first special symbol is being performed, the second special symbol may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (it does not become a normal loss) except when it is a forced loss. It is not limited to the above, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal deviation. For example, by setting the small hit ratio to 1/2, it is possible to make a loss, and when the small hits are continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation). (When) is not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or a miss), a special effect (for example, an effect to notify that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the approach advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to an approach disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to and is provided, and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of opening patterns (see FIG. 15). .. Further, the variable display can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device, and the variable display is predetermined based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control the variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes the variable device to an approach advantageous state, and it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Is. Further, as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example) having different degrees of advantage from the first special state. ) And can be controlled. Then, the variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different ratios depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). , As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. At least in the case of the second KT state, the rate of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and a second special state. Has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, in the first KT state, it is rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game, whereas in the second KT state. Then, a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24 in a small hit game). In addition, it is possible to control the second special state according to the type of advantageous state (in this example, the high probability / second KT state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

Further, it may be configured to execute different effects during the big hit game depending on the type of big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the end of the second KT state. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a stronger impression that the player is controlled in the second special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is inherited from the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the moving image may be inherited and displayed, the round number display may be inherited and displayed, or the prize ball number display may be inherited and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided. It is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state. Further, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is a hit in the normal drawing), and the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state at the same ratio regardless of the state. Whether or not it is determined (in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state). Regardless of which one it is, and whether or not it is in the big hit game state, it is determined with the same probability whether or not it is a normal hit.) Therefore, the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device can be prevented from being affected by the variable starting device that can control the approach advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (probability change state in this example) after controlling to an advantageous state, which is the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). It is possible to control to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) in which the open pattern is selected by the ratio and the variable starter is controlled and the variable display pattern is selected by a different ratio and the variable display is executed. Is. Then, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is completed, the low probability / 1st KT Transition to state). Therefore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with delay means (regulation piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. Therefore, by providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device in the second special state. The rate of entry of the game medium into the game can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example). At the same time, while the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the first special symbol). The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to a predetermined state (small hit game state in this example), and it is also possible to determine a variable display time (variable time in this example), and the second identification information is variable. When the display is executed, it can be determined that the predetermined state is controlled at a higher rate than the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is possible to decide to make a small hit only in some cases). Then, when the control is performed in the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the control is performed in the non-special state (in this example). As shown in FIGS. 13 (C), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, whereas as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). , In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The variable display of any of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) may be configured to be preferentially executed. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol may be out of order. , It is desirable not to be too gambling than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operating gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass is provided, and the player is in an advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the low probability / first KT state is completed. If the player has entered a break due to the long-time variable display, even if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit game will proceed during the break. It can be restricted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interests of the player are impaired.

In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operating gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the advantageous state signal can be output externally. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned gaming machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the gaming machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not always indispensable, and the advantageous state signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the game medium is set in the first area (in this example, the big winning opening). It is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) in which the (game ball in this example) can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the game medium can enter the second region (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased, and as special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first It is possible to control the second special state (in this example, the high probability / the second KT state), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the entry of the game medium into the second region. Therefore, the state of entry of the gaming medium into the second region can be notified to the outside, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100. There is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining a prize ball was performed even though the jackpot game was not in progress, and the hall management computer can determine that it is abnormal. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100 is not determined to be abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output a special signal common to the case where the first special state is controlled and the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally regardless of whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the gaming machine side.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal different from the first special signal (in this example). , Special winning opening winning signal 2) can be output externally, the first special signal can be output externally when controlled to the first special state, and the second special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 The special signal can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output externally during the second KT state). It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the modified example shown in FIG. 33, when the big hit signal 1 is not output and the big hit signal 2 is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the winning ball rate in the first KT state. It may be calculated as (BA1), and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be calculated as the winning ball rate (BA2) in the second KT state. Then, in the second KT state, a corresponding prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is not judged as abnormal, and the prize ball is likely to be a small hit in the first KT state. Is rarely obtained. Therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate management from the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, even though it is not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (special winning opening winning signal 1). And the special winning opening winning signal 2) is also output, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, since the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example), the special winning opening 24 is awarded a prize. It is configured so that only the special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected can be output, and the external output signal is not particularly output when the winning to the large winning opening is detected. Even with such a configuration, the abnormal state of the gaming machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not always indispensable, and the special signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display display result is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state in this example) based on the predetermined display result (small hit symbol in this example). It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state), and to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. It is provided with a specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) into which a game medium (game ball in this example) can enter in a special state, and as a special state, a first special state (high probability / first in this example). It is possible to control a 1KT state) and a second special state (high probability / second KT state in this example), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. In addition, it is possible to execute an approach effect (in this example, display of prize ball addition display, output of prize sound, lighting display of special prize opening lamp 24a) based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state. Therefore, when the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball The addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won in the first KT state), the game state is determined. In addition to being able to achieve consistency in the production of the game, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to a special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (in this example, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the first. It can be controlled to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot). Further, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to be controlled to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R). After the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / 1st KT state, and after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state. 2 It is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) during the period controlled by the special state. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the approach effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display) and an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. (In this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect of emitting light from the light emitter (in this example, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, execution of the entry effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a), and the special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT). Is not always required, and may be configured not to perform one or both of these effects.

In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the variation display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second variation display corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol The case where the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the background symbol are executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible. May be good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp, LED, or the like other than the effect display device 9. May be good.

[Modification 1]
Hereinafter, a modification 1 of the above-described embodiment will be described. In this modification 1, mainly an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 in a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (particularly low probability / first KT state). , An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage may be referred to as the first hold display, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be referred to as the second hold display.

The details will be clarified by the following description, but in this modification 1, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 has a background symbol (the first symbol shown in FIG. 63) according to the variable display of the special symbol. The background symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a are displayed in a variable manner, and the small symbols smaller than the background symbol (first small symbol display unit 91b and second small symbol shown in FIG. 63) are displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol displayed on the display unit 92b is displayed in a variable manner, and the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (second hold display) is displayed according to the game state. The second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 shown in FIG. 63) is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not displayed in total as in the above embodiment), depending on the gaming state. Then, the first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) or the second specific display (second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the second specific display is displayed. The hold number display (first hold storage number display 71 shown in FIG. 63) corresponding to one hold storage number is displayed. Further, in this modification 1, a part different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Is omitted.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707) in the first modification. In this hold storage display control process, the display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received depends on whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. 45, for example. It is recognizable.

When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command (Y in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 updates the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number (step S7072). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the first reserved storage number is added by 1, and when the first variation pattern command is received, the first reserved storage number is subtracted by 1. 1 Hold storage number is stored in, for example, the first hold number storage buffer. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the hold number display (first hold storage number display 71) indicating the first hold storage number added by 1 is updated and displayed. The effect control CPU 201 has a hold number indicating the first hold storage number subtracted by 1 when the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started (when the first change pattern command is received). The display (first hold storage number display 71) is updated and displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7073), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073), it ends the process and is in the non-KT state. In (Y in step S7073), the hold notice determination process is executed (S7074). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the hold notice determination process of step S7074, the display mode of the first hold display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). Decide whether to give a hold notice to change to, and if so, what special mode and how to change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning determination result command. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 has a big hit determination random number (random number 1) and a big hit, which are extracted based on a valid start winning prize and stored in the first hold storage buffer in the first start port switch passing process. Based on the type judgment random number (random 2) and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5), it is judged whether or not it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is judged. Send a command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the hold notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first valid start winning command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 has a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Decide to change to. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. .. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, it is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit, and it is selected at the time of a loss. When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be performed), it is decided to change it to a special mode (for example, “red”) that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate, and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning judgment result command. However, when the jackpot expectation is low (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of jackpot and easy to be selected at the time of loss), a high percentage is used to determine the normal mode that does not suggest the jackpot expectation. May be good. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first hold display to a special mode at the time of starting prize (that is, when receiving the first valid start winning command), another timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed). It may be decided to change the command at a certain timing or a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol). Further, in the hold notice determination process, the first specific display (first specific), which will be described later, is displayed when the first hold display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold display is started. The display mode of the first specific display) on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When the effect control CPU 201 receives the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S7077), and receives the second effective start winning command. If not (N in step S7076), the process proceeds to step S7083.

If the effect control CPU 201 is not in the KT state (N in step S7077), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), is the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time? Whether or not it is determined (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a low probability / 1st KT that is controlled until the special symbol is changed 100 times (that is, up to 100 rotations after the big hit game) after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. It refers to the state. The remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time is, for example, the fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low accuracy / first KT background designation command for the first time by the process of step S633 shown in FIG. 44 after the jackpot game ends. It can be recognized by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of times (100 times) of the chance time.

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less are not equal to or less than the end of the chance time (N in step S7078), the effect control CPU 201 executes the hold notice determination process (step S7079). The hold notice determination process in step S7079 is the same as the hold notice decision process described in the process in step S7074, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the hold notice decision process in step S7074 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7088), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. At this time, if there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be hidden. If the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 normally performs the second hold on the second hold display unit 62. The display is incremented by 1 (step S7082).

When neither the first effective start winning command nor the second starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command and the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. It is determined whether or not there has been a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. When there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process, and when there is a predetermined state change (Y in step S7083), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. The displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden (step S7084). Specifically, when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state changes, the second hold display is hidden. If the effect control CPU 201 has a second hold memory when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. , If the game state has the first hold memory when the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state, the first hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed. do.

Here, characteristic points in the above-described hold storage display control process will be described below.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the hold number display update (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start winning command is received (step S7076). In Y), the hold number display update is not executed. From this, it can be seen that the hold number corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated and displayed, while the hold number corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed. Further, the number of holds corresponding to the number of first hold storage is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (whether it is in the KT state or the non-KT state), whereas the number of hold corresponding to the second number of hold storage is displayed. It can also be seen that is not displayed regardless of the game status.

Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (N in step S7073) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S7075 is not executed). ), When the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the second hold display is not increased unless it is in the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing in steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). .. Further, when the state shifts to the KT state after the big hit, the first hold display is hidden, and when the state shifts from the KT state to the non-KT state, the second hold display is hidden (steps S7083 and S7084). From this, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the hold notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S7079 is not executed by Y in step S7078). .. Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display is not increased (S7082 is not executed by Y in step S7081). For this reason, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted and the addition of the second hold display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second hold display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start process (step S901) in the first modification. In this background symbol variation start process, the same reference reference numerals are given to the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the specific display control process (step S920A) in the first modification. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 are displayed. The second specific display in the unit 62a) and the display control of the shielding effect are performed. Here, the first specific display is different from the first hold display unit 61 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the first special symbol. 1 It is displayed on the specific display unit 61a, and is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the second specific display is different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the second special symbol. It is displayed on the specific display unit 62a and is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the first specific display (or the second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first hold display (or the second hold display) displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (or the second hold display unit 62). It is displayed by. However, the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) may have different shapes or different sizes, and are displayed in completely different modes. You may. For example, it is desirable that the first specific display and the first hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) are displayed in a manner in which a part of the shape and color is similar. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display from being difficult to see.

In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In the case of the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) can be recognized by, for example, the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG. 44.

In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, the display mode of the first specific display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, "blue", "green", "red") different from the normal mode (for example, "white"). It is decided whether to give a specific notice to change the color, and if so, to what special mode and how to change it (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines the specific advance notice based on the received first fluctuation pattern command. For example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is changed to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate. .. Further, for example, when the first fluctuation pattern is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the first fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the first fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of a miss). Occasionally, it is decided to change to a special mode (for example, "red") that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate, and the first fluctuation pattern is that the jackpot expectation is low (that is, when the jackpot is a big hit). When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected and is easy to be selected at the time of deviation), it may be determined in a normal mode that does not suggest a jackpot expectation at a high rate. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first specific display to a special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), another timing (for example, a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is performed. ) May be decided to change. Further, in the above-mentioned hold notice determination process (step S7074), if the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of starting winning (that is, based on the look-ahead), the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead. 1 The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be "green" based on look-ahead, a special mode suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of "green" (for example,). While it is possible to determine (“red”), it is prohibited to determine in a mode that suggests that the jackpot expectation is lower than “green” (for example, “green”) (that is, it is prohibited to lower the jackpot expectation. It may be). Further, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the look-ahead, and in the specific notice determination process. The display mode may not be determined.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state (that is, whether or not it is in the KT state). In step S9305), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S9305), the process is completed, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), whether or not there are 9 fluctuations or less remaining until the end of the chance time. Is determined (step S9306).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less are not equal to or less than the end of the chance time (N in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific advance notice determination process (step S9307). The specific advance notice determination process in step S9307 is the same as the specific advance notice determination process described in the process in step S9303, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the specific advance notice determination process in step S9303 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S9309) until the end of the chance time, the effect control CPU 201 is the second specific in the second specific display unit 62a in the normal mode. The display of the display is set (step S9310).

When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shielding effect (step S9311). Here, the shielding effect is an effect that makes it difficult to see the second hold display and the second specific display. For example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the layer in front of the second hold display and the second specific display. Is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display by gradually lowering the number of times remaining until the end of the chance time. The background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect. Even if the blackout effect is executed, it should be visible.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, the display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (that is, the chance time is entered), the initial number of times (low probability / first KT state) is controlled as the number of times indicated by the remaining number display 81. The remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state by displaying and setting the number of times that the special symbol is deducted by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Indicates the number of remaining times (of chance time).

Here, characteristic points in the above-mentioned specific display control process will be described below.

When the first fluctuation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), the display of the first specific display is not set (N in step S9302) unless it is in the non-KT state (the process in step S9304 is not executed). When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set unless it is in the KT state (N in step S9305) (the processes in steps S9308 and S9310 are not executed). From this, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S9307 is not executed by Y in step S9306). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second specific display is not set to be displayed (S9310 is not executed by Y in step S9309). From this, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted and the display of the second specific display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. As described above, regarding the second specific display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

The description returns to FIG. 61, and in the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S920B). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C). Is set as the first non-display effect as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). On the other hand, in the non-KT state (Y in step S920C), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920D), and any one of the first variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Is set (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation mode of the background symbol or the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation, or the pseudo-ream symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. It is an effect pattern that defines (variable modes such as letting). The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. The first non-display effect is set according to the first variable pattern, and is an effect pattern in which the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b are not variablely displayed (hidden). be.

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the KT state (that is, whether or not it is in the KT state). In step S920G), if it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G), the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and uses one of the second variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Set (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b are not variablely displayed (non-display). It is a production pattern.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 uses the set background symbol variation pattern (see steps S920E, S920F, S920I, 920J), the set specific display (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310), and the set shielding effect (see steps S9304, S9308, S9310). Select the process table according to (see step S9311) and the like (step S920K). As a result, by the subsequent processing, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Here, characteristic points in the background symbol change start processing described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), so that the first background symbol is set. The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S920B), the second background is set as the background symbol variation pattern if it is not in the KT state (N in step S920G). The background symbol is not displayed on the symbol display unit 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b (step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variable display, but the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Even if it is performed, it can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variable display. Further, in the KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variation display, but even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed depending on the display.

Further, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of different special symbols (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small symbol is the first. 2 It is not a separate variable display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other to realize a natural effect, and the target of the variable display of the small symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) depends on the game state. It turns out that it is identified.

[Screen layout]
Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a first hold display unit 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display unit 61, a number of first hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of first hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a provided adjacent to the right side of the first hold display unit 61 at the lower center of the display screen. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the started variation display among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The first hold display unit 61 and the first specific display unit 61a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as a mode of the 1st hold storage number display, the number itself indicating the 1st hold storage number may be used, or the display lamp of the number corresponding to the 1st hold storage number is lit and displayed. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a variation of the first special symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a in the central portion of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b at the upper right of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a second hold display unit 62 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display unit 62, a number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of second hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the second specific display is displayed on the second specific display unit 62a provided adjacent to the right side of the second hold display unit 62 at the lower center of the display screen. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the start variation display among the second hold displays displayed on the second hold display unit 62 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the second specific display unit 62a to be displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second hold display and the second specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold number display corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), during the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the second special symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a in the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b at the upper right of the display screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the remaining number display 81 indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that the chance time is currently in progress (for example, a character display such as "during chance time") is displayed, and in the upper part of the display screen, during chance time (in KT state). A right-handed display is performed to instruct the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aimed at the right side of the game area 7.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / first KT state (for example, a character display such as “during normal rush”) is performed. In the high probability / second KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and in the upper left corner of the display screen. The difference is that a display indicating that the state is in the high probability / second KT state (for example, a character display such as “during special rush”) is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Further, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, and corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the first hold display and the first specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are not displayed, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Therefore, the variation time in the normal state. Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the player for the variation display of the second special symbol, which is appropriate. It is possible to perform production control. Further, in the KT state such as during the chance time, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state, the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, so that the player is small. Pay attention to the variable display of the second special symbol that triggers the hit. Therefore, in the KT state, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the first hold display or the first hold display is performed. By not performing the first specific display, the recognition degree of the variable display of the first special symbol can be lowered, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be paid more attention.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the chance time ( Alternatively, in the KT state), the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the background symbol on the first background symbol display unit 91a in the normal state and the variable display of the background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a during the chance time (or KT state) are displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect, etc.). ), Even if it is hidden (or difficult to see), the player can recognize the appropriate variable display of the special symbol according to the game state by checking the small symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved storage is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, even though the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, there is a risk that the effect will be inconsistent if the display indicating the number of the second hold storages is displayed. Further, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the display of the second hold display is restricted (shielded by the shielding effect or controlled to be hidden). ). Therefore, for example, even though the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, if the number of the second hold storages is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may be inconsistent. Therefore, during the chance time, by not displaying the number of the second hold storage from the beginning, the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time becomes 5 times or less, and the display of the second hold display is restricted. I am trying to realize a natural production. For the above reasons, it is assumed that the number of second reserved memories is not displayed regardless of the game state, but for example, a KT state different from the chance time (a state in which the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit). Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of second hold storages may be displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first reserved memory number display 71 showing the number of the first reserved memory is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not restricted. Therefore, in the normal state, the player's recognizability is ensured by displaying the first hold storage number display 71. There is. Further, even in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less), so even if the first reserved memory remains when the KT state is started, it is immediately digested and the KT state is reached. In, the first hold memory is rarely newly generated because the right-handed hit is performed. Therefore, even if the first reserved memory number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is almost always "0", and it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable. Further, rather, by making the player recognize that the first reserved memory number display 71 indicates "0", it is made to recognize that it is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed). , It becomes possible to concentrate more on right-handed games. For the above reasons, the first reserved storage number display 71 is supposed to be displayed regardless of the game state, but it may be hidden in the KT state.

In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, the variable display of the first special symbol is supported. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b. This is achieved by continuing to turn on and off the color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. The area in which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed (fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, and for example, a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED may be used to display the fourth symbol. 4 The symbol display area may be realized. In this way, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. Further, since the fourth symbol has lower visibility than the background symbol and the small symbol, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second special symbol to the variable display by the player under the normal state, and the KT. In the state, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display and the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit and displayed regardless of the gaming state. .. The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. Further, the hold indicator lamps whose display is controlled by both of them may be provided separately. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this way, even if the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the hold display lamp sets the first hold storage number and the second hold. You can check the number of memories. Further, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than that of the hold display on the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62. On the other hand, the recognition degree of the second hold display can be lowered, and in the KT state, the recognition degree of the first hold display can be lowered for the player.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the game state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the game state. It is assumed that the display positions of the hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (center of the display screen). Although it is said to be the lower part), these may be in different positions from each other. Similarly, in the above, it is assumed that the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (center portion of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 91b. Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right part of the display screen), they may be different from each other. Further, for example, even if the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a (or the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b) are the same, they are displayed separately. By changing the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) to be displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the one corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. May be good. Further, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the small symbols can be displayed at the respective display positions. It becomes. In this case, in the normal state, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b.

[Example of display control such as second hold display during chance time]
Next, an example of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 times or more during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (1), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. Further, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold display can be changed to a special mode, and the specific display can also be changed to a special mode. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player can make a right-handed hit.

FIG. 64 (2) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 times during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (2), at this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. However, since the execution of the hold notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and the second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less during the chance time. As shown in FIG. 64 (3), at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the display areas of the second reserved display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a from being difficult to see is executed. As a result, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to see, and the second specific display on the second specific display unit 62a becomes difficult to see. In addition, this blackout effect gradually blacks out (transparency decreases) as the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it is possible to impressively suggest that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is reduced.

By the way, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are controlled to be hidden. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 is difficult to see (non-display), and the second specific display unit 62a has a second display. The specific display can be made difficult to see (non-display). Further, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are not controlled to be hidden, but are displayed and controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). May be good. Even in this way, since the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the upper layer thereof, the second hold display and the second specific display are made difficult to see, and at the same time, the second hold display and the second specific display are difficult to see. The flow of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display can be simplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), since the second hold display and the second specific display are restricted to be difficult to see due to the shielding effect, the second hold display is shifted and displayed (second hold display). The effect in which is sequentially shifted to the right and the effect in which the second hold display is shifted to the second specific display) are also restricted (becomes difficult to see). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less and there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, all the second hold displays are not displayed. The display may be controlled, and the effect of shifting the second hold display may be limited to non-display.

Further, in the above, it is assumed that the second hold display and the second specific display are blocked by the shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen, which makes it difficult to see (or hides). By changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display or the second specific display may be made difficult to see (or non-display). Here, "changing the layout of the display screen" is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the display item is a concept. It is a concept including all displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9, such as background symbols and hold displays. As a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 in which the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display unit 62a in which the second specific display is displayed are displayed. The display area may be shielded. Further, as a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the second background symbol display unit 92a may be expanded downward to shield the second hold display and the second specific display. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable effect character). .. Further, the second hold display and the second specific display are not completely shielded, and may be difficult to see due to a decrease in their visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display positions of the second hold display and the second specific display are changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display). It may be the one that reduces the sex.

Further, the above-mentioned blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 times or less, and the transparency decreases as the remaining number of times decreases, and the remaining number of times is 10 times or more. At the time of 6 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display can be visually recognized, while when the remaining number of times reaches 5 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display may become difficult to see. In this way, the display control that makes the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see can be made more comfortable. Further, the same effect can be applied when an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the variation display of the final variation of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final fluctuation of the chance time is completed, the background symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the loss (or small hit)) corresponding to the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (for example, the small hit) is displayed. "3", "9", "4") are stopped, and similarly, the small symbols (for example, "3", "9", "4") corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol are stopped. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (becomes hidden), and instead, a left-handed notification that urges the player to left-handed is executed. Although not shown, during the fluctuation of the final fluctuation, an end display (for example, a character display of "Chance time end!") Is displayed to notify that the chance time is over, and the first one is displayed. Based on the value of the prize ball counter, the prize ball number display is displayed during the consecutive villas. As a result, it is notified that the consecutive villas have ended and the total number of prize balls acquired during that period (total number of prize balls won). Further, at this time, the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the chance time may also be notified.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time starts). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a are hidden. Even if it is controlled and a new second effective start winning command is generated (that is, even if a new valid start winning entry 14 is generated), the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. On the other hand, when a new first start winning command is generated by the player making a left hit based on the left-handed notification shown in FIG. 64 (4) (that is, a new effective prize is generated for the first start winning opening). The first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a, the background symbol is variablely displayed on the first background symbol display unit 91a according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol is displayed. The small symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the unit 91b. As a result, the player recognizes the start of the variation display of the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time. When the first start winning command is newly generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is updated, so that the first reserved storage number display 71 is updated and displayed, and the first The first hold display in the hold display unit 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display differs depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in the present modification 1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and is normal. Since left-handed striking is recommended in the state, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be hidden so as not to recognize that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, if the control is performed in the normal state after the end of the chance time, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (5). Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) ends, this second hold display is displayed when the normal state is switched to. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has changed to a special mode at the end of the final fluctuation of the chance time, the player is discouraged by hiding this, or there is a second hold display. Nevertheless, in the normal state, the effect (background pattern, etc.) is not displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modification 1, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed before the final fluctuation of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times). Is controlled to be difficult to see, so the degree of recognition of the player for the second hold display and the second specific display is lowered, and the second hold display and the second specific display are hidden when the normal gaming state is entered. It is possible not to give a sense of discomfort even if it is controlled by. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see, but the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since the display is controlled as much as possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-described modification 1, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less. Is required to be 5 times or less for the following reasons. That is, in the above-described modification 1, since the maximum number of second hold storages is 4, a maximum of four second hold displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible for the player to recognize information for a maximum of 5 fluctuations. Therefore, by controlling the display of the second hold display and the second specific display to be difficult to see when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5, the display was visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time. It is possible to prevent the situation where the second specific display and the second hold display are hidden. The second hold display and the second specific display are displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, and the remaining number of times is more than 5 times (for example, 10 times) or less. The display may be controlled so that it is difficult to see. Further, after the chance time ends (after the transition to the normal state), the second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see, that is, until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, that is, the KT state. The second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a period before and after the timing including the end of.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display are restricted (not executed) on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. However, the reason why the remaining number of times is 9 times or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see. Therefore, if the mode of the second hold display or the second specific display, which is controlled to be difficult to see, is changed to a special mode, the display becomes difficult to see while giving the player a sense of expectation. As a result, the player's expectation may be impaired, or the production may be inconsistent. Therefore, by limiting the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the fourth second hold display, which is the maximum number of holds, shifts as the second specific display after 4 fluctuations. It is displayed, and even if it is controlled to be difficult to see because the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to see. It becomes possible to avoid it. Regarding the second hold display, it is necessary to limit the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less in consideration of the possibility that the shift display is displayed by a maximum of 4 fluctuations. However, this does not apply to the second specific display. Therefore, regarding the second specific display, the specific notice may be restricted on the condition that the remaining number of times that the display becomes difficult to see is 5 times or less. Further, without the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the hold notice of the second hold display and the second hold condition that the remaining number of times is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), which is more than 9 times. The specific notice of the specific display may be restricted.

By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state such as the KT state in which the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to the normal state. In order to confirm the result of whether or not to make a big hit based on the second hold memory, the gaming machine may be intentionally occupied without firing the gaming ball after the end of the KT state. In such a case, it is not appropriate for the gaming store because the operation of the gaming machine is reduced. Further, if the player can recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory remaining after the end of the KT state, all of them are hidden for a long time (for example, if there are four hold of 15-minute long fluctuations). 60 minutes until it becomes) The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, although it is not always a big hit based on the remaining second reserved memory, until the variation display based on the second reserved memory is completed and the pass / fail result is displayed (holding digestion is performed). Since it takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player may miss the opportunity to finish the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to the present modification 1, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed after the end of the KT state, and the second hold is made during the chance time (before the end 5 change). By controlling the display and the second specific display to be difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is a remaining second reserved memory. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the gaming machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, and it is possible to realize a display that does not give a sense of discomfort at the end of the KT state. It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to end the game.

In the above-described modification 1, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state, but the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed regardless of the game state (the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed). Alternatively, it may be difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having the following KT hits and non-KT hits in a predetermined ratio. Here, the KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game is completed. The non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit ends. In such a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, it is conceivable to display a second hold display in order to improve the interest of the game in the KT state after winning the KT hit. Then, if a non-KT hit is won in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating the non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the big hit is confirmed), a right-handed hit is performed in the KT state. Therefore, it is highly possible that a maximum of four second hold displays are displayed. However, if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display that was displayed before the jackpot is confirmed is controlled to be hidden by being controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game. Then, before the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the second hold display, which has changed to a special mode, is hidden, which discourages the player, or even though there is a second hold display, the effect (in the normal state). The background design, etc.) may not be displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the production. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistency in the effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating the non-KT hit in the KT state. It is preferable to control the display (for example, hide). Therefore, for example, based on the look-ahead at the time of the start winning (second prize determination result command), at the timing when the start winning indicating a non-KT hit occurs, the second hold display regarding the subsequent start prize (second hold memory) is displayed. It is conceivable to control the display so that it is difficult to see. However, if the display control based on such pre-reading is performed, it is determined and suggested in advance that the game is a big hit, so that there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT hit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or is difficult to see) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing so, even if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display is not displayed without suggesting that a big hit is confirmed in advance in the KT state, so that the effect of shifting to the normal gaming state is not achieved. Consistency can also be avoided.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine having a non-KT hit, for example, at the timing when the start prize indicating the non-KT hit occurs based on the look-ahead at the time of the start prize, the second start prize (second hold memory) is related to the subsequent start prize. In addition to controlling the display of the hold display so that it is difficult to see, at the timing when the start prize that shows a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined rate occurs based on the look-ahead at the start prize, the subsequent start prize (second) The second hold display related to the hold memory) may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a predetermined period (predetermined number of fluctuations). In this way, the second hold display may be difficult to see for a predetermined period even when it is not a big hit (there is a so-called ghost). Since the second hold display is not displayed even if the player wins the KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect when the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, as described above, in a gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, in addition to the display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see regardless of the gaming state, and the non-KT hit based on the look-ahead. By performing display control that makes it difficult to see the second hold display for a predetermined period when there is a deviation (or a small hit) at a predetermined ratio, inconsistency in the effect can be avoided. These display controls (hereinafter referred to as specific display controls) are not limited to gaming machines having KT hits and non-KT hits, and are large hits according to KT hits and non-KT hits (hereinafter referred to as quasi-non-KT hits). It can also be applied to a gaming machine having a predetermined ratio. Here, the quasi-non-KT hit is a jackpot that can be determined when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, and is from a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, which is the maximum number of the second reserved memory) after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state after controlling the KT state only a small number of times (for example, once). In a gaming machine having such a quasi-non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, when a quasi-non-KT hit is won while being controlled in the KT state, the number of times controlled in the KT state after the big hit game is the second reserved memory number. Less than the maximum number of. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after hitting the quasi-non-KT ends and is controlled to the normal game state, and the second hold display is hidden. When the second special symbol indicating a quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the jackpot is confirmed), a part of a maximum of four second hold displays (remembered later) that may have been displayed. There is a risk that the second hold display) related to the hold memory will be hidden. Therefore, even in a gaming machine having a quasi-non-KT hit in place of (or in addition to) a non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect by performing the above-mentioned specific display control.

In the above, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends, but after the big hit ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, which is the maximum number of the second hold memory). It may be a jackpot controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in this way, since there is a possibility of winning a non-KT hit or a quasi-non-KT hit in the KT state, the above-mentioned specific display control can be applied in the same manner.

Further, the above-mentioned modification 1 is applied to a gaming machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled with a high probability until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (65%), but any big hit is won. However, it may be applied to a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are completed after the big hit game. Further, in this case, when it is controlled in the high probability state, it is controlled to the KT state at the same time, and when it is controlled to the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the normal state. As a result, the frequency of small hits per unit time may be increased. In this case as well, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see from 5 changes before the final change controlled in a high probability state, and the second hold display is held before 9 changes of the final change. The notice and the specific notice of the second specific display may be restricted.

In addition, when controlled in a high-probability state, a gaming machine (so-called falling lottery type gaming machine) that draws a lottery (falling lottery) to determine whether to shift to a low-probability state for each fluctuation, or a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are displayed. In a gaming machine controlled in a high probability state (so-called ST type gaming machine) in a predetermined period (ST period) until the end, when controlled in a high probability state, it is controlled in the second KT state and in a low probability state. When it is controlled, it may be controlled in a non-KT state. In such a gaming machine, when shifting from the high probability state / second KT state to the low probability state / non-KT state (normal state), the final fluctuation controlled by the KT state (second KT state) (that is, fall). In the lottery type, the change in which the fall lottery is won, and in the ST type, the final change in the ST period), the second hold display may be controlled to be difficult to see, and the second specific display may be controlled to be difficult to see.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display or the second specific display is displayed. Is not displayed, and the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are not displayed (that is, the display effect is restricted). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is limited, but also the right-handed hit aiming at winning the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. A notification effect (for example, left-handed notification) may be performed. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the player that the second special symbol is changed and displayed in response to the event of winning the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state is lowered. , It is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that it is an opportunity for the left-handed notification to be performed (right-handed is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to reduce right-handed hits aimed at illegal small hits.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is obtained when the forced disconnection occurs. Even so, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 62b, and the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b even in the KT state. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but since the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot variation, at the same time. When the variable display of the second special symbol that has been changed and displayed is forcibly removed, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating forced loss is stopped on the second small symbol display unit 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which was displayed in a variable manner at the same time, is forcibly removed, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced loss is displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), in the case of a big hit, in the normal state. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, but the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is fluctuated at the same time is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started while the variation display of the second special symbol indicating the jackpot is being performed, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Later, the first normal instruction notification 56A or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the effect related to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is completed without performing the variation display of the first special symbol, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and then the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed. It may be assumed that the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed to passively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a deviation (or small hit) fluctuation in the normal state, the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display 92b (that is, the deviation or small hit) as described above. In the case of a small hit, it may not be notified depending on the display effect).

Further, in the above-described modification 1, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), in the case of a big hit, in the KT state. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, but the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that is fluctuated at the same time is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. In the KT state, since the player usually strikes right, the variation display of the second special symbol may be started when the variation display of the first special symbol indicating the big hit is performed. Mostly. Then, in such a case, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 56B is performed after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It suffices to be notified that it is a big hit. Further, at this time, even if the change of the second special symbol is started, the effect related to the change of the second special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the change of the second special symbol is displayed. (Not executed), instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, although it is rare, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, for example, when the game ball is accidentally won in the first start winning opening 13 and the player leaves the seat when the KT state is controlled. When the variation display (big hit variation) of the first special symbol is completed, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56C is performed after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be assumed that the reduction instruction notification 56D is performed to passively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player usually strikes right, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when the game ball passes through, for example, the operating gate 17 by right strike. 2 It may be possible to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit by performing the normal instruction notification 56B. If the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the KT state, the small symbol is not displayed in the first small symbol display unit 91b as described above (that is, it is displayed in the case of out of alignment). It may not be notified depending on the production).

Further, in the above-described modification 1, the hold notice determination process in step S7079 did not mention the difference between the KT states (first KT state or second KT state), but whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state. The hold notice determination process may be executed according to the above. Specifically, in the hold notice determination process, the display mode of the second hold display is more likely to be changed to a special mode (that is, the hold notice is more likely to be performed) in the first KT state than in the second KT state. good. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the first KT state of the KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the small hit). On the other hand, in the second KT state of the KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit). It becomes easy to give a profit to. Therefore, in the 2nd KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, a miss), but does not expect to win a big hit that may end the 2nd KT state (rather, do not make a big hit for a long period of time). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit occurs, so he expects a big hit instead of a small hit. For this reason, in the first KT state, the hold notice is more likely to be given than in the second KT state, thereby increasing the expectation of the player who expects a big hit in the first KT state and expecting a small hit in the second KT state. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being impaired. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more likely to be changed to a special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). (Easy) may be used. In addition, as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, if there is a non-small hit (normal miss) other than the big hit at a predetermined ratio, the second hold display or the second specific display is a small hit. A hold notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode (for example, the character display of "small") that is expected to exist may be given.

Further, in the above-described modification 1, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. When it becomes, the execution of the hold notice is restricted. However, whether or not to limit the hold notice may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 counts the number of fluctuations after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and ends the chance time. When the remaining number of times up to 9 times or less is reached, a command for prohibiting the hold notice may be transmitted as the second winning determination result command to be transmitted when the second valid start winning is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 that receives the second winning judgment result command gives a hold notice based on the second winning judgment result command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. You can decide whether to execute or prohibit. Further, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notice only when a predetermined hold notice command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 may execute the hold notice. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less, the hold notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start prize is generated. Even in this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the hold notice based on the hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. Similarly, whether or not to limit the specific notice may be determined not by the effect control microcomputer 200 but by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to the first modification, the first modification is a gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information and controlling an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player. Variable display execution means (in this example, a game) capable of executing variable display of identification information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of second identification information (second special symbol in this example) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (book) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (the part that executes steps S26A and S26B) in the control microcomputer 560. In the example, as the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state (the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), and the normal state. A state control means (in this example, a KT state) that can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short fluctuation time at a high rate (see FIG. 13 in this example). In this example, the part that executes steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first information regarding the variable display of the first identification information can be stored as the first hold storage. The hold storage means (in this example, the first hold storage buffer) and the second hold storage means (in this example, the second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the second hold storage. And the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61) and the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (in this example, the second hold display). The hold display means (in this example, the part that executes step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can display the hold display means (the second hold display in the hold display unit 62) is provided, and the hold display means has a special state. During a specific period including the end timing (in this example, the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time), it is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see (see FIG. 64 in this example). I decided. As a result, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including the timing at which the special state (KT state in this example) ends, and is not limited to the period from before the end of the special state to the end (for example, 5 fluctuations before the end). It may include a predetermined period (for example, 5 fluctuations after the end) after the end of the special state (after the transition to the normal state).

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-86643 (Prior Technique 1) and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287 (Prior Technique 2) have a second high probability state (special state) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is described that by setting the fluctuation time of the identification information shorter than the normal state (low probability state), it is possible to control in a state where the frequency of small hits is higher than in the normal state. By the way, in the prior arts 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in the prior art 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in the prior art 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine having a long fluctuation time of the second identification information in the normal state as described in the prior arts 1 and 2, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (second hold display) in the normal state. ) Is not appropriate. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modification 1, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display in the gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state.

Further, according to this modification 1, when the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second identification) is specified. A specific display means (in this example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second specific display in the display unit 62a is further provided, and the above-mentioned specific period (in this example, a chance) is further provided. In the period other than the period (the period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the time), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and in the specific period, the hold display means can display the hold display means. It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see (in this example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081), and the specific display means makes the specific display difficult to see (in this example, it is difficult to see). If it is Y in step S9309, step S9310 is not executed). As a result, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

Further, according to the first modification, the predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). The specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved storage) before the determination of the advance determination means is performed in steps S312 and S215. A part for executing S216 and S322), and the hold display means displays a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. It is possible to execute the first aspect change effect (in this example, the hold notice) that changes to the first special aspect, and the specific display means is a determination target of the advance determination means according to the determination result of the advance determination means. It is possible to execute the second mode change effect (specific notice in this example) that changes the specific display corresponding to the second identification information to the second special mode, and the predetermined period including the specific period (in this example, the chance time). During the remaining period of 9 fluctuations or less until the end), the hold display means restricts the execution of the first mode change effect (in this example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078) and the specific display means It was decided to limit the execution of the second aspect change effect (in this example, step S9307 is not executed when Y in step S9306). As a result, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production during a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

Further, according to the first modification, as the special state, the state control means has a first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and a second special state (the present) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. In the example, it was decided that the control was possible with the second KT state). As a result, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modification 1, the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information. An effect control means (in this example, an effect control) capable of variably displaying a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (in this example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b). A portion of the microcomputer 200 for executing S920D, S920E, S920H, S920I, and S920K) is provided, and the effect control means corresponds to variable display of the first identification information in a normal state (in this example, a non-KT state). Variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) is executed, and the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second background symbol display unit 92a) is displayed. The variable display of the background symbol) is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed when it is Y in step S920C, and step S920J is executed when it is N in step S920G), and a special state (in this example, it is executed). , KT state), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (in this example, the step). Step S920I is executed when it is Y of S920G, and step S920F is executed when it is N of step S920C). 2 Variable display of the reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of any of the identification information (in this example, the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b) is executed (in this example, it is not). Either step S920D or S920H is executed depending on whether it is in the KT state or the KT state). As a result, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

Further, according to this modification 1, the hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), but cannot display the second hold display (this present). In the example, step S7075 is executed when it is Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N in step S7077). As a result, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

Further, according to this modification 1, the hold display means displays the number of first hold storages corresponding to the number of first hold storages regardless of whether the hold display means is controlled in the normal state or the special state (in this example, the hold display means). , 1st hold storage number display 71) is displayed, and the 2nd hold number display corresponding to the number of 2nd hold storage is not displayed (in this example, step S7072 is executed when it is Y in step S7071 and step S7072 is executed. Even if it is Y in S7076, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). As a result, the player's visibility with respect to the number of second reserved memories can be reduced while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be reduced, respectively. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of reserved storages.

Further, according to this modification 1, the game medium (in this example, the game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (in this example, the right side of the game area 7) among the flow paths in which the game medium (game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) and the predetermined condition (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state (this) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area. In the example, the advantageous state control means that can be controlled to the jackpot game state (in this example, the portion that executes steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 when it is Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560). , A predetermined promotion notification (in this example, the first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined period (this example) from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Then, after 10 seconds have passed, the promotion notification means (in this example, the production control microcomputer) capable of executing the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium into the specific area. The portion for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in 200) is further provided. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

[Modification 2]
The second modification of the above-described embodiment will be described below. In this modification 2, an example of display control of the game value (in this example, the number of prize balls won) given to the player in the KT state (first KT state or second KT state) will be mainly described. In the following, the jackpot game state and the subsequent second KT state are included from winning the jackpot controlled in the second KT state after the jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot or sudden jackpot) to the next jackpot (that is, the jackpot gaming state). The number of prize balls won (during the period) is called a special rush vaginal cum shot (or a specific vaginal cum shot), and the display of this specific vaginal cum shot is called a specific vaginal cum shot display. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired between the time when the big hit is won for the first time and the game is controlled to the big hit game state and the time when the KT state ends (shifts to the normal state) is the total number of balls (or special balls). This special payout display is sometimes called a special payout display. The specific payout display is displayed based on the value of the second prize ball counter, and the special payout display is displayed based on the value of the first prize ball counter. Further, in this modified example 2, a part different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Is omitted.

In the second modification, a jackpot type determination table different from the above-described embodiment is used. Specifically, instead of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 65 is used. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in this modification 2, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 35%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 25%. It is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot (sudden probability jackpot)", and is determined as "16R normal jackpot" with a 40% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in this modification 2, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%, and the probability of 15%. Is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot (sudden probability jackpot)", and is determined as "16R normal jackpot" with a 40% probability.

"16R probability variation jackpot" means that by controlling the jackpot game state of 16 rounds, the special variable winning ball device 20 wins a predetermined period (for example, 10 game balls or 29 seconds elapses) in 16 rounds. ) It is a big hit that is opened and controlled to a high probability / second KT state until the next big hit occurs after the end of the big hit game state. The "2R probability variation jackpot (probability jackpot)" is controlled to the jackpot game state of two rounds, but the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened only for an extremely short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in each round of the two rounds. As a result, the jackpot is controlled to a jackpot game state in which it is practically difficult to obtain a prize ball, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot is controlled to a high probability / second KT state until the next jackpot occurs. "16R normal jackpot" means that by controlling the jackpot game state of 16 rounds, the special variable winning ball device 20 wins a predetermined period (for example, 10 game balls or 29 seconds elapses) in 16 rounds. ) It is a jackpot that is opened and controlled to a low probability / first KT state until the end of 100 fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state. After the 100-time variation display controlled to the low probability / first KT state is completed, the normal state is entered. Further, even before the end of 100 fluctuation displays controlled to the low probability / first KT state, if the next big hit occurs, the low probability / first KT state ends and the big hit game state is entered. After the transition and the end of the jackpot gaming state, the game state is controlled according to the type of jackpot.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, all the hits are small hits except the case where the big hits are made. However, in the modified example 2, FIG. 65 (c), The small hit determination table shown in (d) is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined as "missing" with a probability of 100%, and it is not determined as "small hit". As shown in FIG. 65 (d), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "small hit" is determined with a probability of 70%, and the probability of "loss" is determined with a probability of 30%. As described above, in the modified example 2, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may not be a big hit or a small hit. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. As described above, in the modified example 2, small hits are not always obtained. Therefore, when small hits occur continuously, a special effect for notifying the fact (see FIG. 73). The small hit combo display 86) is performed. In the second modification, it is assumed that no small hit occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the ratio is lower than that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (for example, 1%). It may be assumed that a small hit occurs. Even in this way, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the small hit is determined with a higher probability than when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, so that the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The degree of advantage of the display can be made higher than the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the prize ball addition display process (step S657 in FIG. 45) in the second modification. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, but a mode different depending on the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 24 of the special variable winning ball device 22 by performing the prize ball addition display processing of the second modification. Prize ball addition display is performed. In this modification 2, in steps S652 and S655 of FIG. 45, if the display of the special payout display is set for the effect control CPU 201 (see step S976L described later), the first prize ball after addition is added. If the special payout display is updated based on the value of the number counter and the display of the specific payout display is set (see steps S976C, S976G, S976K described later), the second prize ball number counter after addition Update the specific payout display based on the value.

In the prize ball addition display process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the number of the special winning opening 24 in the one small hit opening period based on the received special winning opening winning designation command. , It is determined whether or not this is a predetermined number (3 in this example) or more (step S657A). The one small hit opening period means a period in which the special winning opening 24 is opened in the small hit game state controlled by winning one small hit. Here, the small hit opening period may include a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the special winning opening 24 is closed. This is because even after the special winning opening 24 is closed, it may take a predetermined time for the game ball staying in the special winning opening 24 to be detected by the second count switch 25a.

When the effect control CPU 201 has won a prize in the third or more special winning openings 24 in one small hit opening period (Y in step S657A), the prize ball addition display is displayed in the special addition mode (Y in step S657A). Step S657B) In the case of winning a prize in the special winning opening 24 of less than the third (first or second) in one small hit opening period (N in step S657A), the prize ball addition display is displayed. It is displayed in the normal addition mode (step S657C). Here, the prize ball addition display is a display effect indicating that a prize ball (“10” in this case) has been acquired by winning one game ball into the special winning opening 24, for example, “+10”. It is a character display such as (see the prize ball addition display 83 shown in FIG. 72). Further, the normal addition mode is a display mode in which the prize ball addition display is displayed in, for example, a small size of black characters (see FIGS. 72 (1) and (2)), and the special addition mode is a display mode in which the prize ball addition display is displayed in, for example, red characters. It is a display mode that is highlighted more than the normal addition mode by displaying it in a medium size (see FIG. 72 (3)). The normal addition mode and the special addition mode are not limited to this, and the special addition mode may be highlighted as compared with the normal addition mode. As a result, when a predetermined number (3 pieces) or more of the special winning openings 24 are won in one small hit opening period, the player is notified by the emphasized prize ball addition display.

In step S658 of FIG. 45, the same processing as in step S657 shown in FIG. 66 may be performed. That is, in the case of winning a prize in the third or more special winning openings 24 in one small hit opening period, it is assumed that a special sound is output from the speaker 27 as a winning sound, and one small hit opening period. In the case of winning a prize in the special winning opening 24 less than the third in the above, it is assumed that the normal sound is output from the speaker 27 as the winning sound, and the special sound is emphasized more than the normal sound (for example, the volume is loud, The output time may be long, the sound may be higher, etc.). As a result, when a predetermined number (3 pieces) or more of the special winning openings 24 are won in one small hit opening period, the player is notified by the emphasized winning sound.

As can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 66 and the flowchart shown in FIG. 45, when the second KT state is controlled (Y in step S656), every time a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 24, a prize ball is won. When the addition display is displayed (step S657) and the specific payout display is displayed, the display content of the specific payout display based on the second prize ball count counter corresponding to the prize ball addition display. Is also updated (step S655 of modification 2). Thereby, in the second KT state in which it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball when the small hit game is performed, it is possible to emphasize the winning of the game ball in the small hit game state. On the other hand, when the player is controlled to the first KT state (N in step S656) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit game is performed, the prize ball addition display is not displayed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the process table selection process (step S976 in FIG. 53) in the second modification. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, but by performing the process table selection process of the second modification, a specific payout display or a special payout display is displayed in the jackpot game state or the KT state, and 2R When the probability change big hit (sudden big hit) is won, the notification effect (big hit notification effect) relating to the control of the big hit game state is not executed, while the specific payout display is continuously displayed. In this modification 2, the process shown in FIG. 67 is performed, so that the process of step S983 in FIG. 53 is omitted.

In the process table selection process, whether or not the effect control CPU 201 was controlled to the second KT state when receiving the jackpot start designation command (that is, whether or not the jackpot was hit when controlled to the second KT state). Is determined (step S976A). When a big hit is made (N in step S976A) when it is not in the second KT state (in the first KT state or non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 uses the 16R normal big hit big hit start designation command. It is determined whether or not there is (that is, whether it is a 16R normal jackpot) (step S976J), and if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (sudden probability jackpot) (N in step S976J), a specific ball output display (N). The display of the specific ball output display 82) shown in FIG. 70 is set (step S976K). As a result, if the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is won when the player is not in the second KT state, the display of the specific payout display is started. The specific payout display is displayed based on the value of the second prize ball counter. On the other hand, in the case of a 16R normal jackpot (Y in step S976J), the display of the specific payout display is not set (the process of step S976K is not executed), and the process proceeds to step S976L.

When a big hit is made in the second KT state (Y in step S976A), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a 2R probability variation big hit (sudden big hit) (step S976B), and when it is a sudden big hit (step S976B). In step S976B (Y), the display of the displayed specific ball ejection display (specific ball ejection display 82 shown in FIG. 70) is continuously set (step S976C), and it is notified that the jackpot game state has been entered. A non-notification type jackpot notification effect is set as the jackpot notification effect (step S976D). Since the second KT state is controlled when the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is won, the display of the specific payout display is set in the second KT state (step S976K or step S976G described later). reference). Therefore, in step S976C, the specific ball ejection display that has already been set to be displayed is continuously displayed and set. Further, when the non-notification type jackpot notification effect is set in step S976D, the jackpot notification effect is not executed on the effect display device 9, or even if it is executed, the visibility is low (for example, very limited). The jackpot notification effect (displayed in the area) is executed. Therefore, the player is not notified in a dramatic manner that the game has shifted to the jackpot game state.

The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot when it is not a sudden jackpot (N in step S976B), and when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (Y in step S976E), it determines whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. The second prize ball counter is reset (step S976F), the displayed specific payout display is terminated, and the specific payout display is newly set (step S976G). As a result, the specific payout display is displayed based on the second prize ball number counter at which the counting is newly started. In addition, the specific payout display that was displayed based on the second prize ball count counter before being reset is not terminated, but is stored and managed as a history display, and is newly displayed as a specific payout display. May be displayed separately. By doing so, the number of prize balls obtained from winning the jackpot controlled in the second KT state (16R probability variation jackpot or sudden jackpot) to the next jackpot (that is, by one jackpot). You can check the history of each big hit. It should be noted that this history display may be reset when the KT state ends and the normal state is entered.

When the effect control CPU 201 is a 16R normal jackpot (N in step S976E), the second prize ball counter is reset (step S976H), and the displayed specific payout display is terminated (step S976I). .. The specific payout display that was displayed based on the second prize ball number counter before being reset may be stored and managed as a history display instead of being terminated.

After the processing of Y and S976K in steps S976G, S976I, and S976J, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the special payout display (special payout display 85 shown in FIG. 70) (step S976L), and the jackpot game state. As a jackpot notification effect for notifying the shift to, a notification type jackpot notification effect according to the type of jackpot is set (step S976M). In step S976L, the special payout display is displayed based on the value of the first prize ball number counter, and the first prize ball number counter is reset by the process of step S980 in FIG. 53, so that it is the first time. It is reset when a hit occurs. Further, in step S976M, when the notification type jackpot notification effect is set, the effect display device 9 executes the jackpot notification effect, so that the player is in a jackpot game state. Be notified.

After the processing of steps S976D and S976M, the effect control CPU 201 performs a set jackpot notification effect (steps S976D, S976M), a set specific payout display (steps S976C, S976G, S976I, S976K) and a special output. A process table corresponding to the ball display (step S976L) or the like is selected (step S976N). As a result, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) by the subsequent processing.

Further, in this modification 2, the processing of steps S9007 to S9010 shown in FIG. 55 is modified as follows. That is, in the second modification, if the display setting of the specific payout display or the display setting of the special payout display is performed in the process shown in FIG. 67, the display setting is continued as it is. As a result, even if the big hit game state ends, the specific ball payout display and the special ball payout display displayed in the big hit game state are continuously displayed in the KT state after the big hit game. At this time, the display mode such as the display position and display size of the specific payout display or the special payout display may be changed. Further, the special payout display may be set to be hidden when it is controlled to the normal state. Further, the special payout display may be set to be hidden at the end of the big hit game so that it is displayed in the big hit game state and not displayed in the KT state after the big hit game.

As can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (sudden probability jackpot) is won and the second KT state is controlled after the jackpot game (N in step S976J), a specific ball is ejected. When the display of the display is set (step S976K), but the 16R normal jackpot is won and the first KT state is controlled after the jackpot game (Y in step S976J), the display of the specific payout display is not set. In addition, when it is controlled to the 1st KT state, the specific payout display may be restricted instead of not displaying the specific payout display. Specifically, when controlled to the first KT state, the specific payout display is displayed in a mode with lower visibility (for example, the display size is reduced) than when controlled to the second KT state. It may be a thing. Alternatively, when controlled to the first KT state, unlike when controlled to the second KT state, the specific payout display may be displayed for a very short period of time (for example, only one fluctuation).

By the way, in the second KT state, since it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, a specific payout display is displayed in order to notify the game value (number of prize balls acquired) given to the player. (More specifically, it is updated and displayed according to the winning of the game ball), so that the player can see the increase in the number of prize balls won in the second KT state, which can improve the interest. On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a small hit game, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained is smaller than the number of game balls launched, so that the game value (number of prize balls won). Is in a state where can be reduced. Therefore, it is not appropriate to notify the game value in such a state. Therefore, in the 2nd KT state, the specific ball output display is displayed to raise the expectation of the player who expects a small hit, and in the 1st KT state, the specific ball output display is not displayed so as not to discourage the player. can do.

Further, as can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, the display setting of the special payout display and the display setting of the specific payout display are performed separately (steps S976C, S976G, S976I, S976K, S976L). Therefore, it is possible to distinguish between the specific payout display and the special payout display in the KT state after the big hit game (see FIG. 68 described later).

Further, as can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, when the sudden jackpot is won while being controlled to the second KT state (Y in step S976B), the jackpot notification effect is not executed, so that the jackpot game state is entered. The player is not notified of what has been done (step S976D), and when a jackpot other than the sudden jackpot is won, the jackpot notification effect is executed, so that the player is notified that the game has entered the jackpot game state (step S976M). ). Further, when the sudden jackpot is won while the second KT state is controlled, the specific payout display is continuously displayed (step S976D). As a result, the player is not aware that he has won the sudden jackpot, and the second KT state is still continued based on the previous jackpot (the jackpot before this sudden jackpot) (that is, he has not yet won the jackpot). ) Can be seen.

By the way, when the sudden big hit is won, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened for a short time, so that it may be noticed that the sudden big hit is won. Therefore, when a sudden big hit is won, the special winning opening 24 may be opened instead of the special variable winning ball device 20. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the small hit was won, so that it is possible to make it more unnoticed that the sudden big hit was won.

In addition, when a jackpot signal (big hit signal 1 or jackpot signal 2) is output externally when a sudden jackpot is won, a jackpot counter installed outside the gaming machine is counted up and displayed based on the jackpot signal. There is. If the jackpot counter is displayed as a count-up in this way, it may be noticed that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, in the second KT state, the big hit signal may not be output externally when the sudden big hit is won, and the big hit signal may be output externally when the big hit other than the sudden big hit is won. If a sudden jackpot is won while being controlled in the first KT state (N in step S976J), the subsequent gaming state changes from the first KT state to the second KT state, so that the jackpot notification effect is executed. (Step S976M). Therefore, when a big hit is made while being controlled in the first KT state, the big hit signal may be output externally regardless of the type of the big hit.

Further, as can be seen from the flowchart shown in FIG. 67, the specific payout display displayed when the second KT state is controlled is continued when the sudden jackpot is won (step S976C), 16R. When a normal jackpot is won, the display ends (step S976I), and when a 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the display is newly started by resetting the second prize ball counter (step S976G). .. Therefore, when a sudden big hit is won in the 2nd KT state, the update of the specific payout display is continued, so that the 2nd KT state seems to have continued for a long time (that is, the big hit has not been made yet). be able to. Further, in the second KT state, since it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, the player expects that the second KT state continues for a long time (that is, does not make a big hit). Therefore, when a sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state, the jackpot notification effect is not executed and the specific ball output display is continuously displayed, so that the second KT state is continued (not intermittent). It can be made to appear as if the second KT state lasts longer than the actual jackpot probability (that is, the jackpot does not occur for a long period of time).

[Screen layout]
Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 and 67 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the first KT state (low probability state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the second KT state (high probability state). In the screen layout of the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 66, the same reference reference numerals are given to the parts common to the screen layout of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 68 (1), in the low probability / first KT state (chance time), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) indicates that the chance time is currently in the upper left corner of the display screen. A display (for example, a character display such as "during chance time") is performed, and a special payout display 85 (for example, a character display indicating a total payout of "TOTAL 2040pt") is displayed below the display (for example, a character display such as "during chance time"). The special payout display 85 notifies the player of the game value (total payout, which is the total number of prize balls acquired) given up to the present, which is controlled from the first hit to the first KT state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (2), in the high probability / second KT state (special rush), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) indicates that the special rush is currently in progress in the upper left corner of the display screen. A display (for example, a character display such as "during special rush") is performed, and a special payout display 85 (for example, a character display indicating a total payout of "TOTAL 2040pt") is displayed below the display (for example, a character display such as "during special rush"). The special payout display 85 notifies the player of the game value (total payout, which is the total number of prize balls acquired) given up to the present, which is controlled from the first hit to the second KT state. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, a specific ball ejection display 82 (for example, a character display indicating a special rushing creampie ball “2040pt during special rush”) is displayed. With this specific ball output display 82, the big hit (16R probability variation big hit or sudden big hit) that triggered the control in the second KT state is won, and then the next big hit (to be exact, the big hit other than the sudden big hit is won). The player is notified of the number of prize balls acquired by (that is, in the period including the jackpot game state and the subsequent second KT state).

As shown in FIGS. 68 (1) and 68 (2), the specific ball ejection display 82 is displayed in the second KT state, whereas the specific ball ejection display 82 is not displayed in the first KT state. As a result, in the second KT state where it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, the specific ball output display 82 is displayed to raise the expectation of the player who expects the small hit, and the prize ball is won in the small hit game. In the first KT state, which is difficult to obtain, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by not displaying the specific payout display 82. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), in the second KT state, the special payout display 85 and the specific payout display 82 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. As a result, the player can check how long the second KT state has continued and how many prize balls have been won during that time by paying attention to the specific payout display 82, and the special payout display 85. By paying attention to, you can also check the total number of balls (total number of prize balls) that have been won so far.

[Display control example of specific payout display and special payout display]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, an example of display control of the specific payout display and the special payout display will be described. FIG. 69 (1) shows an example of a time chart when the 16R probability variation jackpot, which is the trigger for being controlled in the second KT state as the first hit, is won, and FIG. 69 (2) is the trigger for being controlled in the first KT state. An example of the time chart when the 16R normal jackpot is won is shown.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 69 (1), when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won as the first hit (in the non-KT state), the jackpot notification that the jackpot gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state is notified. The effect is executed, and then the second KT state is controlled. Then, when controlled to this second KT state, even if the 2R probability variation jackpot (sudden jackpot) is won, the jackpot notification effect for notifying that the game has shifted to the jackpot gaming state is not executed (non-notification). .. Then, if the 16R normal jackpot is won while being controlled to the second KT state after that, the jackpot notification effect is executed in the jackpot game state. At this time, the specific payout display is continuously updated and displayed from the start of the 16R probability variation jackpot game to the time it is controlled in the second KT state, and even if the sudden jackpot is won, it is still continuously displayed. It is updated and displayed (the second prize ball counter is not reset). Then, by winning a big hit (16R normal big hit) that is not a sudden big hit, the display of the specific payout display ends and the second prize ball number counter is reset. If the 16R probability variation jackpot is won as a jackpot that is not a sudden jackpot, the second prize ball number counter is reset, so that the count display of the specific payout display is newly started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (1), the special payout display is continuously updated and displayed based on the first prize ball number counter after the first hit (16R probability variation big hit). As shown in (2), the display ends when the 16R normal jackpot, which is the trigger for being controlled in the first KT state, is won and the first KT state of the specified number of times (100 times) ends (first). The prize ball counter will be reset at the next first hit). In addition, the special payout display is also displayed as a result display during the consecutive villas in the final fluctuation (outside fluctuation) controlled in the first KT state.

Next, an example of the display effect displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 shows an example of the display effect displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 69 (1), and FIG. 71 shows the effect corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 69 (2). An example of the display effect displayed on the display device 9 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 70 (1), when a 16R probability variation jackpot is won as the first hit, as a jackpot notification effect in the jackpot game state, for example, a right-handed hit aiming at a game ball winning in the special variable winning ball device 20 can be performed. It is notified that it is in the jackpot game state. Further, at this time, the specific payout display 82 (for example, "2040pt") is displayed based on the second prize ball number counter that starts counting after the first hit, and the count starts after the first hit. A special payout display 85 (for example, "2040pt") is displayed based on the first prize ball number counter. At this time, the payout (number of winning prize balls) indicated by the specific payout display 82 and the payout indicated by the special payout display 85 match.

As shown in FIG. 70 (2), when the second KT state is controlled after the big hit game, the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device). The special payout display 85 is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed by right-handing, and if it is not a big hit, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability (70%). When the small hit is won, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b are symbols indicating the small hit (for example, "1", "3", "" 5 ") is displayed as a stop. As the symbol indicating the small hit, a special symbol (for example, a pictorial symbol) different from the normal deviation may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 70 (3), when a small hit is won and the small hit game state is controlled, if one game ball wins the special winning opening 24 in one small hit opening period, the game is played. As a winning effect according to the winning of the ball, the prize ball addition display 83 (for example, the character display of “+10”) is displayed. The prize ball addition display 83 is displayed in a normal addition mode or a special addition mode, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. Then, at this time, the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter are updated and displayed, so that the specific ball output display 82 and the special ball output display 85 correspond to the display of the prize ball addition display 83. The display content is also updated (for example, it is updated and displayed from "2040pt" to "2050pt").

In this way, in the second KT state, the prize ball addition display 83 is displayed and the prize ball addition display 83 is displayed every time a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit opening period when a small hit occurs. Correspondingly, the display contents of the specific payout display 82 and the special payout display 85 are updated. Although not shown, the value indicated by the special payout display 85 (total payout indicated by the first prize ball counter) that is updated and displayed in the jackpot game state or the KT state is a default target value (for example, 2500 pt, When the target value set at predetermined intervals such as 5000 pt, 7500 pt, etc. is reached, the arrival ball output display effect (for example, character display such as "2500 pt OVER") for notifying the fact is executed. Further, when the arrival ball output display effect is executed in this way, the special ball output display 85 may not be displayed in the KT state. In the second KT state, when a small hit is won and the small hit game state is controlled, the second specific display and the second hold display are controlled to be hidden, which is the small hit game state. It may be noticed by this.

As shown in FIG. 70 (4), if the sudden jackpot is won while the second KT state is controlled, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a and the background symbol displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b are displayed. The small symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed at a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit (for example, the deviation of "3", "5", and "7"). As a result, the player is not notified that the sudden big hit has been won. At this time, the symbol indicating the small hit (for example, "1", "3", "5") may be stopped and displayed as a symbol different from the symbol indicating the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if a small hit was won instead of a sudden big hit.

As shown in FIG. 70 (5), even if the sudden jackpot is won and the game shifts to the jackpot game state, the jackpot notification effect is not executed, so that the winning of the sudden jackpot is not notified. Further, at this time, the specific payout display 82 is continuously displayed as it is (the second prize ball number counter is not reset). Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if the big hit was not won (as if the small hit was won or it was just a miss). When the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 20 in this big hit game state, it is the same as the prize ball addition display 83 displayed when the game ball wins the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game state. It is assumed that the production of is performed. By doing so, it is possible to make it more unnoticed that the sudden jackpot has been won. As described above, when a sudden big hit is won, the special winning opening 24 is opened instead of the special variable winning ball device 20, so that it looks as if a smaller hit was won. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 70 (6), when the 16R normal jackpot is won while the second KT state is controlled, the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a and the second small symbol display unit 92b are displayed. The displayed small symbols are stopped and displayed at the symbols indicating the big hits (for example, "6", "6", and "6" doublet). As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won.

As shown in FIG. 70 (7), when the 16R normal jackpot is won and the game shifts to the jackpot game state, as a jackpot notification effect, for example, a right-handed hit aiming at winning a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 20 can be performed. It is notified that it is in the jackpot game state. At this time, the second prize ball number counter is reset, and the display of the specific payout display 82 ends. The special payout display 85 is updated and displayed based on the first prize ball number counter (for example, the number of prize balls acquired during the 16R normal jackpot jackpot game is added and "4540pt" is displayed. ).

In addition, in FIG. 70 (6), if the 16R probability variation jackpot is won while the second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 70 (7A), the game shifts to the jackpot game state and the jackpot notification effect is executed. At this time, the second prize ball number counter is reset, and the display of the specific ball output display 82 is newly started. As a result, the total number of prize balls acquired by one big hit (to be exact, not including the sudden big hit in the second KT state) that triggers the control to the second KT state does not span multiple big hits. It will be displayed for each big hit. As a result, how many prize balls could be won for each jackpot that triggers control to the second KT state, that is, how long the second KT state lasted (that is, how long the jackpot was hit). Wasn't there) can be confirmed. At this time, the payout (number of winning prize balls) indicated by the specific payout display 82 and the payout indicated by the special payout display 85 do not match.

As described above, when the second prize ball number counter is reset and the display of the specific ball output display 82 that has been displayed so far ends, the specific ball output display 82 that is displayed as the end is displayed separately as a history display. It may be done. In addition, it is assumed that the ball output indicated by the history display (the ball output during the special rush) is stored in the non-volatile memory for a predetermined period (for example, one week), and the ball output indicated by the current history display is based on the stored history display. It may be used to display the ranking of. In addition, the fact that the ranking of the specific payout display 82 (history display) is high means that the period controlled in the second KT state is long (the number of times the small hit is won is large), that is, the long-term big hit. It means that he did not win (except that he won the unannounced sudden jackpot). Therefore, the ranking of the specific payout display 82 (history display) can be said to be the so-called "addiction" ranking. The ranking of the history display (or the ball output indicated by the history display) may be reset based on the operation of the hall clerk.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), when the 16R normal jackpot is won and controlled to the first KT state, the specific ball ejection display 82 is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device). Instead, the special payout display 85 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 71 (2), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed by right-handing even in the first KT state, and when it is not a big hit, it becomes a small hit with a predetermined probability (70%). Win. However, in the second KT state, it is possible to win a small hit and control the small hit game state to obtain a corresponding prize ball, whereas in the first KT state, the small hit is won and the small hit game state is obtained. It is difficult to win a prize ball even if it is controlled by. Therefore, in the first KT state, even if the small hit is won, the symbols that do not notify that the small hit is obtained (for example, the symbols "1", "2", "4" having the same mode as the normal missed stitch) are displayed. Stop is displayed. When the small hit is won in the first KT state and the small hit game state is controlled, the display of the second specific display and the second hold display is continued (not changed) in the small hit game state. It may be difficult to understand. In the first KT state, when a big hit (including a sudden big hit) is won, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the big hit has been made.

As shown in FIG. 71 (3), in the 100th final fluctuation (outlier fluctuation) controlled to the first KT state, a special payout display showing the total payouts obtained from the first hit to the present during the fluctuations. 85 is displayed. As a result, the total number of prize balls won during the consecutive villas is displayed. At this time, the number of consecutive villas may also be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), when the final variation at the 100th rotation is completed, the background symbol corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the loss (or small hit)). And small symbols (for example, "1", "4", "9") stop, and with the end of the 1st KT state (chance time), the right-handed display ends (becomes hidden), and the player becomes a player instead. A left-handed notification that prompts left-handed is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the present modification 2, the special payout display 85 is displayed in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the second KT state, it is possible to obtain a corresponding prize ball by being controlled to the small hit game state (that is, the special payout display is additionally updated), so that the special payout display 85 is displayed. However, in the 1st KT state, it is difficult to win a prize ball even if it is controlled to the small hit game state (that is, the special payout display is not updated), so in principle, the special payout display 85 is not displayed and the 100th time. The special payout display 85 may be displayed exceptionally only in the final fluctuation of. Alternatively, in the first KT state, the special payout display 85 may be displayed in a mode with low visibility. That is, the special payout display 85 is always displayed in the second KT state, whereas it is displayed only in the 100th final variation in the first KT state, or is displayed in a mode with low visibility. The display may be restricted. As described above, the specific payout display 82 is always displayed in the second KT state, whereas the display is restricted in the first KT state. Therefore, the game value (number of winning prize balls) given to the player, including the special payout display 85 and the specific payout display 82, is displayed in the second KT state, whereas it is displayed in the first KT state. Can be restricted.

[Prize ball addition display]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a display mode of the prize ball number addition display 83 displayed in the second KT state will be described. Although the display of the special payout display 85 is omitted in FIG. 72, it is assumed that the display is actually the same as that shown in FIG. 70 (3).

As shown in FIGS. 72 (1) and 72 (2), when the first and second game balls win the special winning opening 24 during one small hit opening period, the prize balls correspond to each winning. The number addition display 83 is displayed in a normal addition mode (for example, a small size of black characters). Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), when a third or more game balls win a prize in the special winning opening 24 during one small hit opening period, the prize ball number addition display 83 is displayed corresponding to each winning. It is displayed in a special addition mode (for example, medium size in red letters). In addition, in FIGS. 72 (1) to 72 (3), the display position where the prize ball number addition display 83 is displayed may be a position where they do not overlap each other (or even if they partially overlap, all of them do not overlap). .. That is, in one small hit opening period, the prize ball number addition display 83 may be displayed at different positions depending on the number of special winning openings 24 to be won. In this way, even if, for example, three game balls are continuously won in the special winning opening 24 for a short period of time (for example, one second), the winning of each game ball is displayed so as to be distinguishable from each other. Therefore, it is possible to set a long display time (for example, to 5 seconds) of the prize ball number addition display 83 according to the winning of one game ball, and it is possible to execute the more emphasized prize ball number addition display.

By the way, in the second KT state, it is easy to obtain a corresponding prize ball in the small hit game, and the number of prize balls acquired during this period is displayed as a specific payout display 82, so that the player wins the small hit. When you do, expect to win as many game balls as possible in the special prize opening 24. On the other hand, since the special winning opening 24 is opened only for a short time (for example, 0.8 seconds) during one small hit opening period, it is difficult for many game balls to win the special winning opening 24. be. Therefore, when a predetermined number (3 in this case) or more of the game balls are won in one small hit opening period, the prize ball addition display 83 corresponding to this winning is highlighted (special addition mode). By displaying it with), it is decided to produce that rare feeling. In the present modification 2, the predetermined number is set to 3, but the number is not limited to this, and it may be appropriately set according to the length of one small hit opening period.

[Small hit combo production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the small hit combo effect executed in the second KT state will be described. Here, the small hit combo effect is an effect of notifying how many consecutive small hits have been won when the small hits have been continuously won over a plurality of variable displays. This is an effect in which the combo display 86 is displayed. Although the display of the special payout display 85 is omitted in FIG. 73, it is assumed that the display is actually the same as that shown in FIG. 70 (3).

As shown in FIG. 73 (1), when the small hit is won in the second KT state and the small hit is also won in the next fluctuation display (next fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 73 (2), the effect display device 9 A small hit combo display 86 (for example, a character display of "2 combos in progress") is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the (liquid crystal display device) to notify that the small hit has been won twice in a row.

Further, when the small hit is won in the next fluctuation display (one after another fluctuation), the small hit combo display 86 displayed on the upper left of the display screen is updated and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (3A)). It will be updated and displayed with the characters "3 in combo"). On the other hand, if the small hit is not won in the fluctuation one after another (in the case of normal loss), the display of the small hit combo display 86 ends.

As described above, in the modified example 2, the small hit is not always obtained when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, when the small hits occur continuously, the small hit combo display 86 for notifying the fact. Is displayed, the fun of the game is improved. The small hit combo effect shown in FIG. 73 may be realized by the following processing. That is, in the process of step S990 shown in FIG. 54, the combo counter is counted up when there are continuous small hits, and the small hit combo display 86 corresponding to the combo counter is set to be displayed, and the process of step S996 of FIG. 53. If the small hit combo display 86 is displayed after the execution of, it may be set to be hidden and the combo counter may be reset. As described above, in the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, the fact is not notified, so the small hit combo display 86 is not displayed.

If a big hit is made while the small hit combo display 86 is displayed, the combo counter may be reset to hide the small hit combo display 86.

In the above-mentioned modification 2, if a big hit other than the sudden big hit is won while the second KT state is controlled, the second prize ball number counter is reset, and the update display of the specific ball output display 82 ends. I decided to do it. That is, the specific payout display 82 indicates the total number of prize balls acquired by one big hit (to be exact, does not include the sudden big hit in the second KT state) that triggers the control to the second KT state. It is assumed that it is displayed for each big hit without straddling the big hits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific payout display 82 may be updated and displayed over a plurality of big hits. Specifically, the specific payout display 82 may be continuously updated and displayed as long as the jackpot (sudden jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot) that triggers the control in the second KT state is won. In this way, it is possible to display the number of prize balls acquired while the jackpot game state and the second KT state are continuing as the specific payout display 82.

Further, in the above-described modification 2, the specific ball output display 82 is continuously displayed when a sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state (the second prize ball number counter is not reset), but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. Specifically, in the above-mentioned modification 2, the 16R probability variation jackpot is classified into 16R probability variation jackpot A and 16R probability variation jackpot B, and when the 16R probability variation jackpot A is won, the sudden jackpot is won. As in the case of, the specific ball output display 82 is continuously displayed (not reset), and when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is won, the specific ball output display 82 is newly displayed (reset once). May be good. As described above, the specific ball output display 82 may be continuously displayed not only at the sudden jackpot that is not notified to the player but also at the specific jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot A) notified to the player. By doing so, even if the same 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the update mode of the specific payout display 82 will differ depending on which type of jackpot is won, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Become.

Further, the above-mentioned modification 2 is applied to a gaming machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled with a high probability until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (60%), but any big hit is won. However, it may be applied to a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) controlled in a high probability state in a predetermined period (ST period; for example, 100 rotations) until the end of the variation display of a predetermined number of times. In the ST machine as well, as in the above-mentioned modification 2, as a big hit controlled to the second KT state after the big hit game, a 2R probability variable big hit (sudden big hit) in which it is practically difficult to obtain a ball output, and a big hit. It suffices to provide at least a jackpot (for example, a 16R probability variation jackpot) capable of obtaining a payout. In this way, in this ST machine, if the sudden jackpot is won in the second KT state, the ST period starts from that point, but when the ST period ends by not notifying that the sudden jackpot has been won. It can be made difficult to understand, and it can be made to look as if the ST period has been extended. Also, as the ST period is extended in this way (that is, the more you win the sudden big hit), the number of prize balls obtained by the small hit game in the second KT state increases, so with the ST period you do not know when it will end. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the specific payout display that is updated (continuously displayed).

Further, in the above-described modification 2, the pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible. For example, as the specific payout display 82, the number of medals paid out to the player during the AT period or the ART period shall be applied, and as the special payout display 85, the game may be played in a predetermined period including the AT period or the ART period. The total number of medals paid out to the person may be applied.

Further, in the above-described second modification, it is assumed that the number of balls (number of prize balls) related to the payout is displayed (special payout display, specific payout display) as the game value given to the player. However, the displayed game value is not limited to the display of the number of payouts (number of prize balls), and may be, for example, the display of the difference ball. As a method of calculating the difference ball, for example, the following method can be mentioned. As the first method, the number of game balls launched (actual number of launches) is totaled by providing a launch sensor in the vicinity of the hit ball launcher or in the launch passage of the game ball, and the total number of payouts (number of prize balls) is used. The difference can be calculated by subtracting the actual number of shots. As a second method, the number of passing game balls at the out opening and the winning opening is totaled and calculated as the number of outs, and the difference is calculated by subtracting the number of outs from the total number of payouts (number of prize balls). Can be calculated. As a third method, an out sensor is provided in the discharge passage through which the game balls that have entered each of the out opening and the winning opening pass, and the number of game balls that have passed through the out sensor (the number of passing through the out sensor) is totaled. The difference can be calculated by subtracting the number of out-sensor passes from the total number of payouts (number of prize balls). Further, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, the difference ball may be displayed in the same manner, that is, the difference between IN (number of inserted medals) and OUT (number of paid medals) is displayed. May be. Further, as the game value given to the player, whether to display the total display of the number of payouts (number of prize balls) or the total display of the difference balls may be switched by the operation of the player, or the hall. It may be possible to switch by the setting operation of the clerk.

As described above, according to the second modification, the gaming machine is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying the identification information and controlling the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player, and is not. A state control means (in this example, a game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled into a special state (non-KT state in this example) and a special state (KT state in this example) that is more advantageous than the non-special state. It is possible to display a specific display (in this example, a specific payout display 82) regarding the given game value (in this example, the number of prize balls) and the part in which steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B are executed. Specific display means (in this example, a portion that executes steps S976C, S976G, S976K, and S976L in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the state control means is a first special state (this example) as a special state. Then, it is possible to control the first special state) and the second special state (second special state in this example) which is more advantageous than the first special state, and the specific display means is controlled to the second special state. Sometimes it is possible to display a specific display, and when it is controlled to the first special state, it is possible to limit the specific display (see FIG. 68 in this example). As a result, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the special state, the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modification 2, the state is changed into an easy-to-enter state in which the game medium is easy to enter (open state in this example) and a difficult-to-enter state in which the game medium is difficult to enter (closed state in this example). A variable starting device that can be changed (in this example, the variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device that is provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and allows the game medium to enter (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22). And the variable starter control means (in this example, the variable starter control means) capable of controlling the state of the variable starter by the non-specific open pattern and the specific open pattern in which the game medium is more likely to flow down to the predetermined variable device than the non-specific open pattern. A portion that controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state for 5.5 seconds or 0.2 seconds as shown in FIGS. 15 (1) and 15 (2) by executing step S26C in the game control microcomputer 560. ), And when controlled to the first special state, the variable starting device is likely to be controlled in a non-specific opening pattern (in this example, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15). Is released for 5.5 seconds), which makes it difficult for the game medium to enter the predetermined variable device, and when the game medium is controlled in the second special state, the variable starting device is easily controlled by the specific opening pattern (this). In the example, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds), so that the game medium can easily enter the predetermined variable device. As a result, the degree of advantage of the special state can be changed by the opening pattern of the variable starting device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to this modification 2, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed in parallel. Possible variable display execution means (in this example, a portion that executes steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560) and variable pattern selection means for selecting a variable display variation pattern (in this example, a game control micro). A special state control means (in this example, a small hit game state) that can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (the part that executes steps S301 and S351 in the computer 560). The portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S358 to S360), and the ratio of being controlled to the special state based on the variable display of the second identification information is based on the variable display of the first identification information. Higher than the rate controlled to the special state (see FIGS. 65 (c) and 65 (d) in this example), the variation pattern selection means is controlled in the non-special state when controlled in the special state. As the variation pattern of the variable display of the second identification information, the variation pattern of the variation time shorter than the variation time of the specific variation pattern (15 minutes of the second variation pattern # 01 shown in FIG. 13 in this example). (In this example, the second fluctuation pattern # 03 with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds shown in FIG. 13) can be easily selected. Thereby, by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage can be changed between the special state and the non-special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to this modification 2, a special state control means (in this example, a game control microcomputer) that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. A portion of the computer 560 that executes steps S358 to S360), a predetermined variable device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22) into which the game medium can enter when controlled to a special state, and a second special state. A special effect executing means (book) capable of executing a special effect (in this example, the prize ball addition display 83) each time the game medium enters the predetermined variable device when the game medium is controlled to a special state. In the example, the effect control microcomputer 200 includes steps S657B and S657C), and the specific display means changes the display content of the specific display in response to the execution of the special effect (book). In the example, it is determined that the display content of the specific payout display 82) can be updated. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the predetermined variable device in the special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

Further, according to this modification 2, a special state control means (in this example, a game control microcomputer) that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. (Part of executing steps S358 to S360 in the computer 560) and, in the case of being controlled to the second special state, when the special state is continuously controlled based on the continuously variable display of the identification information, a special effect is produced. (In this example, it is decided to provide a special effect executing means capable of executing the small hit combo display 86). As a result, it is possible to emphasize that the special state has occurred continuously, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second special state.

Further, according to this modification 2, the specific display means is a display different from the specific display (in this example, the specific ball ejection display 82), and corresponds to a predetermined period including an advantageous state and a special state. It is possible to display a special display (in this example, a special payout display 85) regarding the given game value (in this example, the number of prize balls), and when controlled to a special state, a specific display and a special display are displayed. Can be displayed separately (in this example, see FIGS. 70 (2) and 71 (3)). As a result, the player can grasp the game value (in this example, the number of prize balls) given in accordance with the predetermined period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the second modification, the advantageous notification executing means (in this example, the step in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of executing the advantageous notification (in this example, the jackpot notification effect) relating to being controlled in the advantageous state. A part for executing S976D and S976M) is provided, and the advantageous states include a first advantageous state (16R probability variation jackpot in this example) and a second advantageous state (in this example) having a lower degree of advantage than the first advantageous state. , Sudden jackpot), and when controlled to the first advantageous state, it is controlled to the second special state after the end of the first advantageous state, and when controlled to the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is controlled. After the end of, the advantageous notification executing means executes the advantageous notification regarding being controlled to the first advantageous state when it is controlled to the second special state (16R in this example). The jackpot notification effect based on the probability variation jackpot is executed), and when the second special state is controlled, the execution of the advantage notification regarding the control to the second advantageous state is restricted (in this example, it is based on the sudden jackpot). The jackpot notification effect is not executed). As a result, the execution / restriction of the advantageous notification changes according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the interest of the game in the second special state can be improved.

Further, according to the modification 2, the signal output means (in this example, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in the advantageous state can be output externally (in this example, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2). A portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the same processing as in step S2015X and the second special symbol stop processing) is provided, and the signal output means is first advantageous when it is controlled to the second special state. When the state is controlled, the advantageous state signal is output to the outside, and when the state is controlled to the second special state, the advantageous state signal is not output to the outside when the state is controlled to the second advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal that matches the content of the advantageous notification, so that the content of the external output does not reduce the interest of the game.

Further, according to this modification 2, the advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state (in this example, 16R normal jackpot) and a special advantageous state (in this example, a sudden jackpot) having different degrees of advantage, and is specified and displayed. When the means is controlled to a special state, the means displays a specific display (for example, a specific payout display 82) regarding the game value (in this example, the number of prize balls) given in response to the special state. When controlled to a special state, the specific display is terminated when controlled to a specific advantageous state, and when controlled to a special state, the specific display is continued when controlled to a special advantageous state (in this example, the figure). 70 (4) to (7)). As a result, the continuation / end of the specific display changes according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified examples 1 and 2, the case where the low probability / first KT state is configured to end based on the execution of the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the second KT state (in this example, the high probability / the second KT state) may be configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times, and conversely, the second KT may be configured based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified examples 1 and 2, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit is shown, but the small hit may also be configured to be provided with a plurality of small hit types. good. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be released may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning ball device to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be configured differently depending on the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified examples 1 and 2, the transition to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) is mainly made in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the high probability / first in the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot. The case of shifting to the 1KT state and shifting to the low probability / first KT state in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the jackpot type is the same, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation jackpot or 6R normal jackpot is used, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment and the first and second modifications, the KT state is internally controlled, but when the first KT state is controlled, a small hit occurs. Although it becomes easier, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won, and from the player's point of view, it looks as if it is controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a gaming machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, the "ratio is different" means that the ratio is different due to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not only the ones, but also the ones with different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one has 100% allocation and the other has 0% allocation). be.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, for example, when a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", background symbols (effect symbols), and ordinary symbols are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. However, the variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit that controls the device may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is another. A sound having a function of a circuit mounted on a board (for example, the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4 or the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control board (/ lamp board) and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a player operates an operation lever. When multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the situation and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to apply it to slot machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium as a gaming machine is taken as an example, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes. The present invention is not limited to this, and it can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications 1 and 2, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination of probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, the probabilistic state is controlled after the jackpot game ends. Although a gaming machine is shown, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probabilistic state after completion.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is classified as a non-special state (for example, a non-KT state). , S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) which is more advantageous than the non-special state. Specific display means (for example, steps S976C, S976G, S976K in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a specific ball output display 82) regarding the given game value (for example, the number of prize balls). , S976L, and the state control means has, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a first special state) which is more advantageous than the first special state. It can be controlled to (2KT state), and the specific display means can display the specific display when it is controlled to the second special state, and can limit the specific display when it is controlled to the first special state. (See, for example, FIG. 68) Further, a variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. The winning ball device 9022) and special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a portion that executes S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) are provided, and the variable winning means is controlled to the special state. It is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and a special feature in the small hit game. (Realized by setting the opening period of the variable winning ball device 9022 to 0.8 seconds), the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first period in which the variable display period is the first period. A variable display pattern (for example, second variation patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation) and a second variable display pattern (for example, a second variable display pattern including a continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. It can be executed by the two fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28), and the ratio of the variable display controlled by the second variable display pattern to the special state after the variable display is executed in the special state is the first variable display computer. It is lower than the rate controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the turn (for example, in the case of a small hit, the rate determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is low (or). Not decided). (See FIG. 88) Examples include gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game in the special state can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production. Further, since the ratio of being controlled to the special state differs depending on the type of the variable display pattern, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display pattern to be executed. When controlled to a special state, the display mode differs depending on the type of the special state, so that the type of the special state can also be noticed.

Depending on the type of special state, the rate at which the variable display is controlled by the second variable display pattern in the special state and then controlled by the special state, and the ratio of the variable display controlled by the first variable display pattern after the variable display is executed are controlled by the special state. The ratio may be different from the ratio. For example, assuming that the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed is 25%, in the first special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Is 15%, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is 10%, and in the second special state, the special state is performed after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Assuming that the ratio controlled by the state is 20% and the ratio controlled by the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is 5%, the second special state is the second more than the first special state. The variable display pattern may reduce the rate of control to the special state after the variable display is executed. Alternatively, in the second special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern is 25%, and is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. In the second special state, the ratio may be set to 0% so that the special state is not controlled after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. In this way, the second special state is controlled more advantageously than the first special state, so that the game entertainment in the second special state is further improved.
Further, among the special states, only in the second special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is special after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. It may be lower than the rate controlled by the state. For example, assuming that the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed is 25%, in the first special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Is 10%, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is 15%, and in the second special state, the special state is performed after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Assuming that the ratio controlled by the state is 20% and the ratio controlled by the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is 5%, in the first special state, the variable display is performed by the second variable display pattern. The rate of being controlled to a special state after is executed may be higher. Even in this way, the second special state is controlled more advantageously than the first special state, so that the game entertainment in the second special state is further improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) by performing variable display, and is a first game machine in which a gaming medium can win a prize. The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) in which the state and the game medium can be changed to the second state in which the winning is impossible or difficult is different from the advantageous state, and the variable winning is made. Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including changing the means to the first state (for example, a portion that executes steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560). A step in a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than a normal state. S902208A, S902211A, S902212A, S902209B, S902210B, S902213B, S902214B), and the variable winning means is a game launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to a special state. A medium is provided so as not to win a prize (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. The variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 25, # of the shortened variation). 27) and the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect), which is the second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period, can be executed and is special. In the state, the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is lower than the rate of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern (for example). In the case of a small hit, the ratio determined to the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 88). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 74 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 901 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

As shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 9014) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 909b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol display unit) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. 909c). It should be noted that the ease of visually recognizing the display contents means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. In addition, the winning means that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 909a and second variable display unit 909b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has two variable display units. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the effect symbol variation display on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display 908b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first special symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second special symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a. Further, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 909a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 909b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total number of hold storages) which is the total of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b are each composed of one display, and the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. I will let you.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 9013 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

Above the gate 9032, a nail group 55 forming a flow path of the right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders to the left and right. However, it is designed to flow down. Since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later.

An actuating gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 9017 is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a.

Below the actuating gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 74, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 9024 and the second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 moves the bottom member forward in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 9024, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 74, the variable winning ball device 9015 The special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 9022. Further, as shown in FIG. 74, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged adjacent to each other, the game area 907 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 9015, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and falls toward the out opening 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 is used to perform a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 78) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is provided in the special winning opening 9024. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 9013a or the second starting winning opening 9013b. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 9024 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operating gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning opening 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Perform the striking operation). Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 909 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure it so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

Decorative lamps 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. Top frame lamps 9028a, left frame lamps 9028b, and right frame lamps 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball burnout lamp 9052 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 905 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 907 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 908a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 909a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second special symbol display unit 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 909b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or after a certain period of time has passed since the special variable winning ball device 9020 was opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the right to continue may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit game state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The gaming state does not transition to another gaming state before and after the gaming state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 909c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 909c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 909c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 909c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 75 to 77 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the variable winning is achieved. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 90101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 9024, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 90102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 9023 on the back surface side (rear) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 9023 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom member 9023 is movable back and forth between the forward-moved state shown in FIG. 76 and the backward-moved state shown in FIG. 77, and the bottom member 9023 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 75 to 77, a flow path forming base 90112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 90101, and a forward movement is performed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 90112. The upstream region 9023U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023, and the upstream channel 90113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 9023. A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 9023, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 on the bottom surface member 9023 side, and the special winning openings 9024 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 9023 from below to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024.

The upstream side flow path portion 90113 and the downstream side flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (back side of the game area 907) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112. Has been done. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, consisting of an upstream side flow path portion 90113, a bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream side flow path portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 90118 are formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 90118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 90117. One regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion that covers the 90114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulation pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 76, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or variable winning ball device 9015) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 77, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom surface member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 78 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. The input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 to control the game of the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020, the solenoid 90106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the solenoid 90206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 79, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including a effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in the built-in or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 79 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. 78. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs the sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. It also supplies the decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the phone number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the telephone number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 79). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 that controls the effect display device 909. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S904). In interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped, such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 in the pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like is one round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter or the like). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 81. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b. Execute (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2': Determines which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the initial value of random 1')
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 81, the game control microcomputer 90560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. There may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol process process (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs the hold storage process (step S9027a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect, which will be described later, are not immediately executed but are executed with a delay. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, when the detection signal from the second count switch 9025a is input in the prize ball processing in step S9030, the payout control for immediately designating the number of prize balls is 15. A command is output, the payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, but the CPU 9056 uses the CPU 9056. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 83A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 83 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. 83 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 83 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 83B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 83 (B) is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 83 (B) is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit, and has already been described. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 83 (A). If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 83 (B), it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 83 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 83 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 84 (A), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the second KT state. See steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S902210B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not the second KT state even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to a probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902210A, S902221A, S902212B, and S902213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902213A and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S902212B and S902213B described later). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S902214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (see steps S902215B and S902010 to S902013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

FIGS. 85 to 87 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 85 to 87 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of # 01 to # 29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 29) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 85 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT shown in FIG. 85 (B) is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 86 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 86 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 86 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 86 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 86 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. NS. In addition, when a small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 86 (E) is shown. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 86 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation is applied. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. In this embodiment, it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 909, a symbol fanning effect such as a reach effect or a sliding effect is executed.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 86 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 86 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 86 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 87 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 87 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second start winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 87 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 87 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 20 to # 24 is used. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / 1st KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), even when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are included. # 23 may be determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 87 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 87 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 29.

As shown in FIG. 87 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation of the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. Pattern # 28 may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 29 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a high rate so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed even shorter in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and execute a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, a specific example of the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation patterns of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol [high probability / at the time of the second KT] shown in FIG. 87 (I). In the second special symbol variation pattern table [high probability / second KT] shown in FIG. 87 (I), judgment values are assigned for each variation pattern, but in the example shown in FIG. 88, they are assigned. The ratio of the judgment values (that is, the determination ratio for each fluctuation pattern) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 88, in this embodiment, when the probability is determined to be out of the range in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rate is 30%. In, the second variation pattern # 26 including the continuous effect is determined. Further, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second fluctuation pattern # including the continuous effect is determined at a rate of 5%. 28 is determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol whose display result is not a big hit is displayed as the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, It can be executed by # 27) and a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28).

In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, but the game ball is launched due to the provision of the nail group 55. It is configured to take at least 1.0 second from the to the special variable winning ball device 9022. That is, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of the small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured so that it cannot be forced. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the effect of the production cannot be enhanced. There is a risk of causing it.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the fluctuation is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # 28) having a relatively long fluctuation time. The rate at which small hits occur after the execution of is lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the variation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Judgment value is assigned to. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time is determined at a rate of 5%. However, it may not be decided. That is, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the second fluctuation pattern # 28 is not provided or the determination value is not assigned to the second fluctuation pattern # 28, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the fluctuation pattern. The small hit may not occur even after the display is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the second fluctuation patterns # 26, # including the continuous effect are set as fluctuation patterns having a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation patterns of shortened fluctuations (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). 28 is provided, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an effect other than the continuous effect (for example, when the display result is off, when the small hit, and when the big hit is common is common. A variation pattern including (such as the reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

For example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the shortened fluctuation, which is a variation pattern that is out of alignment after the predetermined reach effect is executed, and a variation pattern in which a small hit is obtained after the predetermined reach effect is executed. A fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit after the predetermined reach effect is executed may be provided. Also in this case, the rate at which a small hit occurs after the variation display is executed by the variation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is executed depends on the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27). It is desirable that the judgment value is assigned so as to be lower than the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed. Further, if the big hit is not obtained after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the ratio of the missed hit is higher than that of the small hit.

In addition, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, one of three or more fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times can be selected, and the ratio of selecting from the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is increased. You may. For example, when the display result is off, when it is a small hit, and when it is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20), respectively. When a fluctuation pattern (variation time 30 seconds) including the second reach effect and a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) is provided. > The selection ratio may be increased in the order of the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds). Further, the fluctuation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the fluctuation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) are displayed in this order. If the result is not a big hit, the percentage of misses may be higher than that of a small hit. With such a configuration, even if a small hit occurs, it is not possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024, and on the contrary, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the interest is lowered and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the rate at which small hits occur is low (or does not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. Even in the first KT state, the rate at which small hits occur after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time may be low (or not generated).

Further, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. Even if the game ball is fired after a hit has occurred (specifically, after the small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been notified), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, and even if the nail group 55 is not provided, a predetermined period (for example, for example) before the game ball arrives at the special winning opening 9024. It may be realized by arranging it at a position that takes 1.0 second or more, which is longer than the opening period.

In addition, when the player is in the KT state, a right-handed notification that urges the player to launch a game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 907 (for example, a character display of "right-handed" is displayed on the effect display device 909. When it is configured to display an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27), and when the variation display is executed. Right-handed notification may be executed in a different manner from when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) having a relatively long variation time. For example, in the KT state, when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 26 and # 28), the rate of small hits is low and the right-handed operation is performed. Since it is unlikely to be disadvantageous to the player even if it is stopped, it is "right-handed" than when the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). Character display, arrow display indicating the right direction, etc. may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed stroke. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable right-handed notification according to the situation.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 89 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 89 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (1). As shown in FIG. 89 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 89 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (2). As shown in FIG. 89 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of alignment, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be out of alignment, the outlier is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 89 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 89 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game balls is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is in progress. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 with respect to the number of game balls fired in the game area 907.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is done by executing (see step S9026C). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not to hit the normal map. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 89 (1). The second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 9015 is opened for a long time is controlled, and the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 89 (2) is opened for a short time if the special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 9015, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 second from the launch of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 89, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 9015 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032 The variable winning ball device 9015 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special winning opening 9024 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing the nail group 55 and shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the game ball is variable after passing through the gate 9032 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 9015. Since the winning ball device 9015 is set to start opening, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

In this embodiment, in order to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation of the normal symbol is provided. Although the time is set as short as 0.2 seconds, the capture element may be eliminated by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the capture element may be eliminated by the position, shape, and opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special winning opening 9024 is such that the period until the game ball launched after the small hit occurs reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special winning opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special winning opening 9024 by the small hit. The position, shape, and opening pattern of the ball may be defined.

90 and 91 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) are the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b Controls to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a winning determination result) indicating the content of the winning determination result. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designation command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained, whether or not a small hit is obtained, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 93) described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. To judge. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the result is "missing", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "6R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "2R normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 7 designation command) in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined in which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern falls, and the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern) is obtained. The command shown may be sent. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the fluctuation pattern.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal process (step S90300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S9036) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S90307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S90212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S90213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 94) (step S90215). .. In the process of step S90215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1'), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5') are extracted and stored in the storage area. Stored. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly extracts a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') in the first variation pattern setting process described later. It may be.

FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 94, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are filled with a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1'), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2'), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5'). ) Is memorized. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes the winning determination process (step S90216), and controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, and the big hit type are determined separately. At the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning judgment process is executed in advance to make a big hit. Check whether it will be a small hit and the type of big hit. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random 1') with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 83 (A), and determines whether or not they match. Check. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random 1') with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. 83 (A), and they are compared. Check if they match. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S90216 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes before the fluctuation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, if a probability change jackpot or a sudden probability change jackpot occurs before the start of the fluctuation, the probability change state changes from the normal state. It may have changed to.) Therefore, the gaming state at the start winning and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S90216 to S90218 are executed and a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command and the first valid A set of two commands of the start prize designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300, it means that the first special symbol display 908a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished is determined by, for example, 30 seconds in the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally finished. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053A), the value of the first reserved storage area is decremented by 1 (the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is issued. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High probability / 1st KT background specification command is judged to be in 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT state is judged to be high probability / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processing after step S9064A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1') from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064A). Step S9065A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot (step S90160A), the jackpot type is memorized (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. do. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S9066A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068A is determined.

In step S9065A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first selects one of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 85 (A) to 85 (B) according to the game state. (Step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5') stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 85 should be used (step S901700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S901702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 90200.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S901121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S901122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control the transmission of the designated command (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the CPU 9056 moves to step S901123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S90304) (step S901124A).

By executing the process of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 90200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 909a in the first variable display unit 909a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S90302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 92 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 101, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S90312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S90322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (N in step S901125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state is "0" (step S902010), and in "0". If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S902011), and whether or not the value becomes "0". (Step S902012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 9056 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state (1st KT flag). Step S902013) and step S902014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S902014, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S902014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S902015).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S902017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S902019), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate (step S902020).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 9017a has been input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits the first jackpot start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first jackpot opening preprocessing. Set to the corresponding value (step S902503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 9017. The game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a, so that the game shifts to the big hit game.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a first jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the first jackpot end processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S902200A), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step S902204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S902201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S902202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203A), and the process is ended.

In step S902204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S902209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S902211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902212A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” in the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 93 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is a loss (including the case where it is a forced loss)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to a value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S90357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release preprocessing (step S90358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to set the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open control. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S90359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 89). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350, it means that the second special symbol display 908b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S9051B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was finished is determined by, for example, 30 seconds in the timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is finally finished. It can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 90560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. (Step S9053B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 9055 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S9063B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processing after step S9064B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1') is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. , Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1') was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1') from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064B). Step S9065B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). .. Then, based on the random 2', it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S90160B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S90161B). The process proceeds to step S9068B.

If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (may be a small hit determination random number) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9068B.

Then, in step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S9068B is determined.

In step S9065B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. 96. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 96, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7 specified command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) shown in FIG. 97. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 97, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 98 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 98, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S90358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. 99. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 99, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process has been explained.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a second jackpot end process (step S90357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S902204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S902201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S902202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203B), and the process is ended.

In step S902204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S902206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S902208B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. A first KT storage flag indicating that the item has been stored and a second KT memory flag indicating that the device has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S902208B, it is determined whether or not the first KT memory flag or the second KT memory flag is set. You just have to check. If neither the 1st KT state nor the 2nd KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the 1st KT flag is set and the state shifts to the 1st KT state (step S902209B). If it was in the first KT state or the second KT state before the start of the big hit, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S902210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

By executing the processes of steps S902208B to S902210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S902211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S902212B). Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets "100" in the KT count counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like (step S90701). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. .. Further, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). Further, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S90709). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

FIGS. 105 to 107 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S90630), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S90631). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S90632). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S90633), and also displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 909, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S90634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). If the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S90638). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90639). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S90640), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S90643). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the first KT pattern (step S90644). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S90645), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S90648). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern (step S90649). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S9064, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed. The number of prize balls is displayed during the state), but the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is ended and the low probability / non-KT state is returned by executing the process of steps S9063 and S90634. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls ends.

Further, in this embodiment, the process of steps S90639 and S90644 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the first KT pattern in the first KT state, and the process of step S90649 is executed to display the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing of steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening prize designation command (step S90650), the production control CPU 90201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step S90650). Along with step S90651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 9024. Along with (step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 9024) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S90655).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 9024 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 9024. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S90661). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous fluctuation display was a small hit is reset (step S90662), and the small hits are continuously generated. The small hit continuous number counter indicating the number of hits is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect can be executed when the small hits occur continuously, but the process of steps S90662 and S90663 is executed. Therefore, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after the variable display that becomes a small hit is executed, the continuous small hit even if the variable display executed after that becomes a small hit. The production is configured so that it is not executed.

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201 sends the received symbol specification command to the first free start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step S90665).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step S90666), the effect control CPU 90101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S90706) shown in FIG. 104. In the background symbol process process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes the hold sequence effect control process that controls the hold sequence effect (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 909c starts the variation. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S90901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

Background symbol change processing (step S90902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S90903). In the process of changing the background symbol, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the variation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S90903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit medium process (step S90908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904), the jackpot display process (step S90904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to the value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S90908) is set on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S90904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S90905).

Processing during the round (step S90905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S90906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

Small hit middle processing (step S90908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the hold memories currently stored, that is, a hold sequence that suggests that the jackpot is continuously executed. The production can be performed.

In the hold continuous effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the command indicating the jackpot is included in the set) of the start prize designation command) (step S903502).

When a command indicating a jackpot is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous jackpot confirmation" is displayed, so that there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot among the hold memories currently stored, and the jackpot is continuous. Is notified that it will be executed.

In this embodiment, if there is a hold memory that is a big hit in the first hold memory for the variable display of the first special symbol that is currently stored, or the second hold for the variable display of the second special symbol. When there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the memory, it is configured to be able to notify that the big hit is continuously executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the second hold memory. It is possible to notify that the jackpot is continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, and if there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot in the first hold memory, the jackpot continues. It may be configured not to notify that it is executed. Further, it may be possible to notify that the jackpots are continuously executed only when there is a hold memory that becomes a specific jackpot (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the timing during the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either in-round processing (step S90905) or post-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that the timing is during the jackpot game.

If it is the timing during the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903505), and if it is not set, the process ends. If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not a new round has been started in the jackpot game (step S903506). For example, it can be confirmed by comparing the content of the received large winning opening opening display command with the content of the previously received large winning opening opening display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds during the hold continuous production, and displays the effect based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 controls to display the number of rounds (steps S903507 and S903508). After that, the process ends.

If it is not the timing during the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot end effect processing (step S903907), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the end timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the process ends as it is. .. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the game state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probabilistic change state is controlled after the big hit game, the effect display device 909 displays the character display of "probability change rush", and when the effect control is controlled to the KT state, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In, the character display of "small hit time rush" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 109, the game state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game. Notification may be performed by displaying the character display of "No second KT". Further, also in this case, the notification may not be performed when the hold continuous effect is executed, and the notification may be performed only when the hold continuous effect is not executed.

If the command indicating the jackpot is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 is reset if the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S903512), and the value of the total number of rounds counter is also reset. (Step S903513).

As shown in FIG. 109, in this embodiment, when the hold continuous effect is executed by the processing of steps S903502 to S903503, the effect display device 909 determines "continuous jackpot determination" at the start of the previous jackpot game. By displaying the character display, it is notified that the jackpot is continuously executed. Further, by the processing of steps S903504 to S903508, the total number of rounds of the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game is shown during the execution of the hold continuous production, and a series of big hit games are executed. It can be made to look like it is being done.

Further, by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, when the hold continuous effect is not being executed, the game state (for example, the probability change state or the KT state) controlled after the end of the jackpot game is notified, but the hold continuous effect is executed. When it is inside, those notifications are not performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game ends and the normal game starts, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. ..

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the hold continuous production is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if a small hit occurs, the execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is completed and the normal game is being performed, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. can.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a background symbol variation start process (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a small hit is determined by, for example, the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area (see step S90618) indicating the small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (whether or not the display result 7 designated command is stored).

If the variation display started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the hold continuous execution flag is set (step S90921b), and is set. For example, according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the process table for holding continuous time according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used is selected (step S90921c). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932. The process table for hold continuous time selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit (for example, the small hit notification, the continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. In this embodiment, the execution of the effect related to the small hit is prohibited during the execution of the hold continuous effect, but for example, it is inconspicuous (for example, the display size is small and the color is small). It may be restricted by executing it in a form (thin, etc.).

If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit flag was set last time (step S90923). If the small hit flag is not set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is not a small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that small hits have occurred continuously. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the small hit flag is set last time (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and small hits occur continuously), the effect control CPU 90201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table according to the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits is selected ( Step S90925).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S90922, the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the continuous small hit effect may be configured to be executable in both the first KT state and the second KT state.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S90926).

FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 111A shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S90924. Further, FIG. 111B shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 2 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 111C shows a case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 2 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, 3 continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected in (when a small hit occurs) is shown. Further, FIG. 111 (D) shows the case where the value of the small hit continuous number counter is 3 or more in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, continuously in the variation display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for a number of consecutive small hits of 4 times or more) selected for (when small hits occur 4 times or more) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C. There is. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character A appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character A. .. Further, the continuous small hit effect B is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character B. Further, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character C appears on the effect display device 909 and a character display such as "one more time!" Is displayed as a line of the character C.

In this embodiment, the case where the type of the character is different depending on the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the type of character display may be different or the display color of character display may be different depending on the type of continuous small hit effect. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or the effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed, and various as the continuous small hit effect. It is possible to produce various aspects.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which three types of continuous small hit effects A to C can be executed, but not limited to such a mode, four or more types of continuous small hit effects are continuously small. The hit effect may be configured to be executable, or only two types of continuous small hit effects may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that there is only one type of continuous small hit effect.

As shown in FIG. 111 (A), when the previous fluctuation display was not a small hit (that is, when continuous small hits did not occur), there was no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, if the previous variation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined as N in step S90923, it is as it is. It may be configured to move to step S90931. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), when small hits occur twice in succession in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low ratio.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), when small hits occur three times in a row in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect C may be configured to be determinable at a low rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), when small hits occur four or more times in succession in this variation display, it is determined at a rate of 20% without a continuous small hit effect, and a rate of 10%. Is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. .. That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second continuous small hit fluctuation is high, FIGS. 111 (C) and 111 (D) are shown. As shown in the above, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the small hit fluctuations of the third and subsequent times in a row. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third consecutive small hit fluctuation is high, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the fourth or more consecutive small hits or more. In the small hit fluctuation, the execution rate of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it becomes difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. 111 makes it difficult to execute the same type of effect as the type of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set, and when the continuous small hit effect is continuously displayed in the variable display thereafter, the flag is set. If the flag is set, a type of continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A may be configured to be executable.

Further, in this embodiment, when the previous variation display is a small hit (when small hits occur continuously), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 111 (B) to 111 (D) is used. Although the case is shown in which the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined by executing the lottery process, the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous variation display is a small hit, the continuous small hit effect may be unconditionally executed without performing the lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, a case is shown in which the type of the continuous small hit effect to be executed from the plurality of types of continuous small hit effects A to C is determined by the lottery process. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, and if it is the third small hit in a row, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the variation pattern and determination of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table is selected according to the type of continuous small hit effect (step S90928). Then, the process proceeds to step S90932.

In this embodiment, the process table selected in step S90928 is used to execute the processes of step S90933, which will be described later, and step S90944 of the background symbol variation processing, so that the effect display device 909 continuously displays the background symbol variation. A small hit effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol during the second KT state, the rate of the variation display of the shortened variation is increased (this). In the example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (I) and 88, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortening fluctuation is determined at a rate of 95%) is shortened. A fluctuation display other than the fluctuation may be performed (in this example, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background symbol fluctuation start processing shown in FIG. 110, when the fluctuation display this time is a small hit fluctuation, it is further determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation of the shortened fluctuation. By executing the processing of steps S9092 to S90928 only in the case of a pattern to enable the continuous small hit effect to be executed, when the continuous small hit effect is executed, it is always executed in the variation display of the shortened fluctuation. It is configured as follows.

Unless the fluctuation display started this time is a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag (step S90929) if it is set, and the number of consecutive small hits. The value of the counter is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

After clearing the small hit continuous number counter in step S90930, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step S90922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927). The effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S90931). Then, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S90933). For example, the background symbol display unit 909c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 26, # 28, # 29), step S90933 and the background described later are described according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By executing the process of step S90944 of the process during the change of the symbol, the continuous effect is executed during the change display of the background symbol. Further, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (in the case of the second fluctuation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 29), steps S90928 and S90931 By executing the processes of step S90933 and step S90944 of the background symbol changing process described later according to the process table selected in the above, the battle effect is executed during the background symbol variation display.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S90940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S90944).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S90950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S90950, for example, when the effect control CPU 90201 executes the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90903) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S90970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S90974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S90983. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is set. The process proceeds to step S90983 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 uses the effect display device 909 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S90971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S90974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S90976). In step S90976, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. In this process table for continuous holding, for example, a fanfare effect that emphasizes that a new big hit game is started is not executed, a simple fanfare effect is executed, or a big hit game that replaces the fanfare effect is performed. It is configured so that an effect or the like indicating that it is restarted is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed by the first big hit game and the later big hit game.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90978).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern (step S90979). For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control is performed to newly start the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the display of the number of prize balls by the jackpot pattern is started or switched (see step S90979) in the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 113, but only in such an embodiment. do not have. For example, in the jackpot display process (step S90904), the process during the first round after starting the jackpot game (step S90905), and the like, the same process as in step S90979 is performed to start or switch the prize ball number display according to the jackpot pattern. It may be configured as follows.

After that, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S90985). In step S90985, when the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process table for hold continuous execution may be selected. The process table for the pending continuous time is configured such that, for example, the small hit medium effect is not executed, a simple small hit medium effect is executed, or an effect alternative to the small hit medium effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous effect is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, a small hit occurs between the end of the previous big hit game and the start of the later big hit game. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit will be restricted.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S90987).

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972 and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 is the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S90989).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S90908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S909202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S909203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S909205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S909206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207 Move to. In step S909207, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the previous small hit flag if it is not set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step S909208).

In this embodiment, as described above, when the variation display other than the small hit is started, the previous small hit flag is reset and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). Therefore, if the small hit game is executed based on the first variation display that becomes the small hit after executing the variation display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, so that the previous time. The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit continuous number counter. Therefore, if a small hit occurs again in the next fluctuation display, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice in succession based on the value of the small hit continuous number counter being 1. Then, when step S909208 is executed by ending the small hit game and the value of the small hit continuous number counter is updated to 2, and the small hit is made again in the next fluctuation display, the small hit is continuous. Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that small hits have occurred three times in a row. After that, even if the small hits occur four times, five times, and so on, by checking the value of the small hit continuous number counter, it is possible to check how many times the small hits occur continuously. Can be determined.

Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S90900) (step S909209).

FIGS. 115 to 118 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S90707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S90501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (first KT state, second KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big prize opening When a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 9024, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the number of prize balls displayed by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90503, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 90201 is set to whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the first prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is entered in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball count counter. However, by executing the processing of steps S90500 to S90509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We will continue to execute the first prize ball increase production until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the jackpot game is ended. By then, the production in which the number of all prize balls is increased is configured to be completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S90511), and holds the holding sequence. It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the hold continuous execution flag is set, the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the hold continuous production, the processing is terminated as it is without performing a small hit-related effect such as a prize ball increase effect or a prize-winning effect. If the hold continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, during the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90515). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90516). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90515, the first KT pattern is used. In the displayed number of prize balls display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 9024), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not the award is satisfied (step S90518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 wins the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S90521). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S90522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processing of steps S90510 to S90522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is completed. By the time, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls is completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect effect (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S90525). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

If the winning effect executing flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 909 (for example, character display such as "+15"). (Step S90526) and control to start the winning effect on the effect display device 909 (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, the process proceeds to step S90529.

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90532). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S90531, the second KT pattern is used. In the displayed and enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the effect effect (step S90534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S90536). If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 does not yet match the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again performs the prize balls at the second speed on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls (step S90537). Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 909. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S90539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S90540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, S90535 to S90359. The prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the prize ball number increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds x 15 = 7.5 until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 9024 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 9024 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production will be continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the 3rd prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the 3rd prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S90540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to end the winning effect (step S90542).

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as "+15") (step S90545), and starts the effect display device 909 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S90546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the second KT state, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning effect is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special prize opening 9024 during the execution of the prize production. In such a case, the prize is waited until the execution of the prize production is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not, it is executed every time the timer is interrupted, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 9024 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 9024 is won. (See steps S90523, S90533, S90534).

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the background symbol process process, the step The prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be executed before the processes of S90900 to S90908 are executed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display and a prize production are executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024. For example, the special prize opening lamp 9024a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 9024, and the effect that the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a gaming machine configured to be provided with a so-called general winning slot (a winning slot in which a variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won, and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification. Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of limitation of KT notification and small hit notification. In addition, in FIGS. 119 and 120, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

FIG. 119 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the hold continuous production is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 119 (A), during the big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), when the big hit game is completed, a character display 90312 such as the line "small hit time rush" of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification notifying that the game is controlled to the second KT state. (See step S903511).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 119 (C) and 119 (D), when the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right, and the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed, the small hit is derived. As a notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as "small hit has occurred!" Is displayed. In addition, the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern is displayed.

FIG. 120 shows a specific example when the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted while the hold continuous production is being executed. As shown in FIG. 120 (A), during the first big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and the character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as the dialogue of the character 90301. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), even if the big hit game is completed, the KT notification is not performed because the hold continuous production is being executed (that is, the character display 90312 such as "small hit time rush" is displayed. (See steps S903509 to S903510), character 90301 and character display 90302 continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the small hit symbol "135" is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display after the first big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not performed. (That is, the character display 90306 such as "small hit occurs!" Is not displayed). At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 120 (C), the number of rounds (“Round 16” in this example) is continuously displayed from the time of the final round of the first jackpot game, and “Still more! Character display 90313 such as "" is displayed, and it seems that the jackpot game is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), when the second big hit game is started, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. Display 90302 is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 120 (D), the number of rounds displayed (“round 17” in this example) is displayed by adding the number of rounds of the first big hit game to the number of rounds of the second big hit game. , It seems that a series of jackpot games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 120, a production in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order through the previous jackpot game period, the variable display period after the jackpot game ends, and the later jackpot game period is produced. It may be executed or a specific movie image (for example, an image of a video in which a character operates based on a specific story) may be displayed to make it appear that a series of jackpot games are being executed. ..

Next, the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification will be described. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions of the KT notification and the small hit notification.

As shown in FIG. 121 (A), when the jackpot game is started, if there is a hold memory 4 that is a jackpot among the currently stored hold memories 1 to 4, the jackpot is continuously executed. Notification of the pending ream is performed to notify that. In this case, after the jackpot game is completed, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed. Further, even if a small hit occurs based on the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and the execution of the effect related to the small hit is restricted.

When it is notified that a big hit occurs multiple times in a short period of time by the hold continuous production, at the same time, it is also notified that the period controlled to the KT state (particularly the second KT state) after the big hit game is short. There is a risk of degrading the interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hits are continuously executed by the hold continuous production, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the end of the big hit game, and even if a small hit occurs. By restricting the small hit notification (and the display related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect), it makes the player feel that a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is prevented that the holding rendition will rather reduce the interest.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of the first big hit or the second big hit, when the big hit game is started, if there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit, the hold continuous production can be executed. For example, the jackpot type of the later jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot not controlled by the second KT state, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot of the previous jackpot. If either of the types is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled by the second KT state), or if both are applicable, it is notified that the second KT state is for a short period of time. Therefore, the execution of the hold continuous effect may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency may be reduced). Further, for example, when the configuration is such that the KT state (or the second KT state) is always controlled after the big hit game, the hold continuous effect may be executed.

Further, the situation in which the hold continuous effect can be executed is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal that is not controlled to the second KT state). When the jackpot is 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot and 6R probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect is executed. It may be possible. In this case, after the end of the previous jackpot game, it is not controlled to the second KT state, and it is desirable that the next jackpot occurs earlier. .. Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game this time. In the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), the jackpot type of the later jackpot is 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type of the later jackpot. If the jackpot type of the previous jackpot is a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state, a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R normal jackpot, and a 6R probability variation jackpot), the hold continuous production can be executed. You may try to do it. Even in this case, it is desirable that the next big hit occurs early, so that the pending continuous production does not rather reduce the interest.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), when both the first jackpot and the latter jackpot type are 16R probability variation jackpots (that is, jackpots controlled in the second KT state), the jackpot game starts. When the jackpot is played (or during the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game), after notifying that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot game this time, a pending sequence that notifies that the jackpot is continuously executed. May be notified. In this case, even if a small hit occurs based on the hold 1-3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the effect related to the small hit such as the display of the prize ball increase display, the winning effect, and the continuous small hit effect) is performed. Restrict it so that it will not be damaged. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the same situation as in the case of FIG. 121 (B) above, and rather deteriorating the interest due to the hold continuous production.

In addition, when executing the hold continuous production, the control that makes it appear that a series of big hit games is being executed is not performed, and the normal game is performed between the previous big hit game and the later big hit game. You may.

FIG. 122 is a modification of the hold continuous effect control process in the example shown in FIGS. 121 (B) and 121 (C) in which a normal game is performed between the first big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. It is a flowchart which shows.

In the hold continuous effect control process shown in FIG. 122, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot display process (step S90304), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

If it is the start timing of the jackpot game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a command at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command and a valid starting winning designation command (first valid starting winning designation command or second valid). It is confirmed whether or not the set of the start prize designation command) includes a command indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, a jackpot controlled in the second KT state) (step S903510).

If the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is not included (N in step S903510), whether or not the effect control CPU 90201 is controlled to the second KT state after the jackpot game this time according to the jackpot type this time. (Step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "with second KT" and the character display of "without second KT". After that, if the hold continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the process ends.

When the command indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is included (Y in step S903510), if the jackpot this time is the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 this time. After the big hit game of, the player is notified that the second KT state is not controlled (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying the character display of "no second KT".

Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the jackpot exists in the hold memory and the jackpot is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, in the effect display device 909, the character display of "continuous big hit confirmation" is displayed, so that it is notified that the big hits are continuously executed. After that, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the hold sequence execution flag indicating that the hold sequence effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the process.

By executing the processes of steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, the jackpots other than the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R probability variation jackpot that are not controlled by the second KT state) are controlled. Occasionally, if there is a hold memory that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled in the second KT state), the hold continuous effect can be executed. Further, when the processing of steps S903510, S903511, S903512, and S903513 is executed to control the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled in the second KT state), the 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, the second KT state) If there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot controlled by), the hold continuous effect can be executed after notifying that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state. In the example of FIG. 122, the hold continuous effect is executed after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled in the second KT state. After executing (that is, after notifying that the jackpots are continuously executed), it may be notified that the jackpot controlled this time is a jackpot not controlled by the second KT state.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123 to 126 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 123 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 124 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 125 and 126 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 123 to 126, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 123, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 123 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90300 according to the jackpot pattern (see step S90979), and for example, the character 90301 is displayed. Then, a character display 90302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 90301. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123, a case is shown in which the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90300 by the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 909, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 123 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. When, for example, a character display 304 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, a case where the prize ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown as the prize ball number display 90303 by the first KT pattern. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes a second prize ball increase effect (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 124 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. do. In the example shown in FIG. 125 (A), in the second KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern (see step S90649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 90306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the prize ball number display 90305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 9024 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 90305 is started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 125 (B), as an effect effect, a case where a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305 is shown. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 9024, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526) and a prize effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 125 (B), an effect in which a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a prize effect is executed, and a character display 90309 such as "+15" is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 909, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). ~ S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 (C) to 126 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 9024 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect is completed as shown in FIG. 126 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 126 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the winning ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S90526) as shown in FIG. 126 (H) based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect. The production is started (see step S90527).

After that, until all the prize ball number displays including the number of prize balls based on the prizes to the special prize opening 9024 generated additionally in FIG. 126 (E) are updated, the second prize ball increase effect is performed. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, as an effect effect, a case is shown in which an effect image 90307 with a glittering mode is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305, but the effect is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 90305 in some form, such as displaying an image of an aspect that covers the prize ball number display 90305. By acting on the prize ball number display 90305 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 90305 difficult to see.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 123, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 124. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. 125 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. The number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be continuously displayed until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by recognizing the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 127 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 127, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S90530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S90523). Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 127, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 127, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 127. In addition, after finishing the winning effect for the first prize, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 9024 (special variable winning ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning productions are not finished, as shown in FIG. 127, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game. It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the prize-winning production.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In addition, in FIG. 128, for example, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variable display that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the variable display of the background symbol on the left, middle, and right is started. In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect is reached during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 128 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. Along with the appearance of the A90310, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character A90310.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect B, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 128 (B-2). Along with the appearance of the character B90312, the continuous small hit effect B is executed in a mode of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character B90312.

Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display is determined by the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 128 (B-3). Along with the appearance of the character C90313, the continuous small hit effect C is executed in a manner of displaying the character display 90311 such as "one more time!" As the dialogue of the character C90313.

Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit effect will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if small hits are not continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be infeasible (see steps S90929 and S90930).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), when small hits are continuously generated in a plurality of fluctuation displays, a continuous small hit effect is produced in the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which small hits are continuously generated. It is feasible (see steps S90921a-S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect are determined when the second and subsequent variable displays in which small hits are continuously generated are started (step). (See S90926), when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variable display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), a case is shown in which a continuous small hit effect can be executed during the fluctuation display in which a small hit occurs, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, the continuous small hit effect may be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variation display in which the small hit occurs.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence and the type of the continuous small hit effect is determined at the start of the variation display when the small hits occur continuously is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. .. For example, when the small hit occurs, the effect control microphone computer 90200 starts the small hit game (for example, after determining Y in step S90983 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing shown in FIG. 113). Based on the winning judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, and the fluctuation display to be started next is also small. If it is a hit, the same process as in steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

Further, for example, when a small hit occurs, the effect control microphone computer 90200 has a timing during which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit game during the small hit game (for example, during the small hit game). At any timing in the middle of the small hit game, such as the timing when the start prize is generated during the small hit game), the next start is based on the look-ahead judgment result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is also a small hit, and if the fluctuation display to be started next is also a small hit, the same process as in step S90926 shown in this embodiment is followed. The presence / absence and type of continuous small hit effect may be determined. Then, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect may be executed from the timing in the middle of the small hit game to the next variation display.

Further, in this embodiment, when the plate on which the game ball is paid out (the hitting ball supply plate 903 or the surplus ball receiving plate 904) becomes full, the full tank notification may be executed. For example, the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply plate 903 and the surplus ball receiver 904 can be detected by a detection means such as a sensor, and when the detection means detects that the stored amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, the effect is produced. The display device 909 displays the character "full tank error" or outputs an error sound to execute the full tank notification. Here, in this embodiment, the prize balls are paid out more frequently in the jackpot game state and the second KT state, but in the second KT state, the prize balls are not paid out as much as in the jackpot game state at one time. The full tank condition is easily resolved. Therefore, the execution mode of the full tank notification may be different between the jackpot game state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.) as compared with the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification is executed. You may want to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015) that can change between the first state in which the game medium can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win. And the special variable winning ball device 9022), which is a state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the change of the variable winning means to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared with the normal state. Then, the variable winning means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special state is controlled (for example, the flow of the game ball is delayed). It is realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). Further, the variable display that does not trigger the control to the advantageous state in the special state is the first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variable display patterns # 25 and # 27 of shortened variation). It can be executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the second variable display patterns # 26 and # 28 including the continuous effect) in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period. Then, in the special state, the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio of being controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 28, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low (or not determined). See FIG. 88). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered and enhance the effect of the production.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the related effects related to the special state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effect, display of prize ball increase display, winning effect, etc.) The related effect executing means that can execute (the effect related to) and the hold related to the variable display that triggers the control of the advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pending continuous effect) suggesting that information is included, and when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the earlier advantageous state and the later Restricting means that restricts the execution of related effects when controlled to a special state with the advantageous state (for example, small hit notification, continuous small hit effects, display of prize ball increase display during execution of hold continuous effects, The execution of productions related to small hits, such as winning productions, is restricted). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state, it is a variable that triggers the control to the first advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means. The suggestion effect can be executed when the pending information regarding the display is included (see, for example, FIG. 121 (B)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first advantageous state is controlled, the hold information stored by the hold storage means includes the hold information related to the variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state. In this case, the suggestion effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 121 (C)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered.

Further, in this embodiment, the promotion notification means (for example, the effect display) capable of executing the promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route when controlled to the special state. The device 909 is provided with a character display of "right-handed", an arrow display indicating the right direction, etc.), and the promotion notification means is when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. , The promotion notification may be executed in a different manner from the time when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time in the KT state (that is, the fluctuation pattern). , The variation display is executed by the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) than when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). , The character display of "right-handed" and the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively encourage right-handed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, a storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, a hitting ball supply plate 903 or a surplus ball receiving plate 904) and a full tank notification indicating that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. The tongue notification means (for example, realized by displaying the character "full tank error" in the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound) is provided, and the tongue notification means is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be possible to make the execution mode of the full tank notification different between when the player is in the game and when the game is controlled in the special state (for example, in the second KT state, the game mode is modest as compared with the jackpot game state. The full tank notification may be executed depending on the mode (for example, the character size of the "full tank error" is small, the error volume is small, etc.), or when the stored amount exceeds the first predetermined amount in the big hit game state. , The full tank notification may be executed, and in the second KT state, when the stored amount exceeds the second predetermined amount, which is larger than the first predetermined amount, the full tank notification may be executed.) With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result (in this example, the jackpot symbol), the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game) has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the special state. It is possible to control the state), and when the display result of the variable display becomes a special result (in this example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the special state. Further, in the special state, the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is frequently executed, and the second 2 Small hits may occur only when the variable display of special symbols is executed). Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, "high degree of advantage" means, for example, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) or a special state (in this example, a small hit game state). It means that the degree of expectation for acquiring a game medium per game is high. For example, a variable winning ball device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022) may be opened for a long time or may be opened many times to obtain many prizes. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a lot of game value, such as getting a lot of balls.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (in this example, a big hit). Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased as compared with before the special condition is satisfied. Further, in the special state, when the next variable display after being controlled to the special state is executed and the special state is controlled again, the special effect (in this example, the continuous small hit effect) is executed. It is possible. Therefore, the monotonousness of the gametability related to the special state can be eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the counting display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024). It is possible, and the first display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern) and the second display mode (in this example, the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted more than the first display mode. ), The count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, in the big hit pattern during the big hit game state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 909. As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated near the center of the effect display device 909). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is displayed as the counting display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when performing some kind of gauge display or countdown display in the effect as the count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 9024 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, some gauge display level. It may be the one that the condition of up is satisfied. Further, for example, in the case of applying to a slot machine, it may be assumed that a predetermined opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of a small winning combination or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number display is additionally displayed as an update display, but not limited to such an embodiment, when some count display is subtracted and displayed, this implementation is performed. It may be configured to apply the configuration shown in the form.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc. shown in 77, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, an example is obtained in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as a ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 908a 1st special symbol display 908b 2nd special symbol display 909 Production display device 909a 1st variable display unit 909b 2nd variable display unit 909c Background symbol display unit 9013 1st start prize Mouth 9013a 1st start opening switch 9014 2nd start winning opening 9014a 2nd starting opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Acting gate 9017a Acting gate switch 9018c Design hold memory display 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom member 9024 Special winning opening 9023a 1st count switch 9025a 2nd count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 Production control board 90200 Production control microcomputer 90201 Production control CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means that can control a non-special state and a special state that is more advantageous than the non-special state.
It is equipped with a specific display means that can display a specific display related to the given game value.
The state control means can control the first special state as the special state and the second special state which is more advantageous than the first special state.
The specific display means
When the second special state is controlled, the specific display is displayed, and the specific display is displayed.
When controlled to the first special state, the specific display is restricted,
Moreover,
A variable means capable of changing into a first state in which the game medium can pass through the predetermined area and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to pass through the predetermined area.
A special state control means that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the change of the variable means to the first state.
It is provided with a granting effect executing means capable of executing a granting effect when a game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state.
The variable means is provided so that the game medium launched toward the variable means cannot pass through the predetermined area after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It is feasible with the second variable display pattern and
In the special state, the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the percentage,
The granting effect executing means
In the second special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is executed.
In the first special state, when the game value is given based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the predetermined region in accordance with the control of the special state, the granting effect is not executed.
The second special state is a state in which the game value is more likely to be imparted because it is easier to control the special state than the non-special state.
In the variable display when the second special state is controlled, when the special state is controlled, a predetermined notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is used as a notification effect for notifying the result of the variable display. And
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the variable display when controlled to the first special state, the predetermined notification effect is not executed as the notification effect when controlled to the special state.

Images